You are on page 1of 267

BSC6900 GSM

V900R012C01

Hardware Description
Issue

03

Date

2010-09-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users with
a detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name

Product Version

BSC6900

V900R012C01

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Installers

Site operators

Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.
2 Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.
3 Cabinet
The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

About This Document

4 Components of the Cabinet


Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box
or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,
independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cabling frame.
5 Subracks
This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.
6 Boards
This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.
7 Cables
This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.
8 LEDs on the Boards
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
9 DIP Switches on Components
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided,will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
iv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

About This Document

Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

About This Document

Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt


+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means


the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

vi

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving


the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.......................................................1-1
2 Physical Structure.......................................................................................................................2-1
3 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Classification of Cabinets................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Components of the Cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................3-8
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet...................................................................................................................3-9
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components.................................................................3-9
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet........................................................3-13
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-19
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR...........................................................................................3-30
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR .........................................................................................3-33

4 Components of the Cabinet.....................................................................................................4-1


4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box..............................................................................................................4-3
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box.......................................................................4-3
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box........................................................................4-4
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box...................................................4-5
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box.......................................4-6
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box...................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box............................................................................4-8
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box.............................................................................4-9
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box.....................................................4-10
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box..........................................4-11
4.3 Air Defence Subrack.....................................................................................................................................4-13
4.4 Rear Cable Trough........................................................................................................................................4-14
4.5 Cabling Frame...............................................................................................................................................4-14
4.6 KVM..............................................................................................................................................................4-15
4.7 LAN Switch...................................................................................................................................................4-16
4.8 GBAM...........................................................................................................................................................4-18
4.8.1 Functions of GBAM.............................................................................................................................4-19
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Contents

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)...........................................................................4-19


4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)......................................................................4-22
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)..............................................................................4-25
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack..............................................................................................................................4-28
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack.......................................................................................4-28
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack..................................................................4-29

5 Subracks.......................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Classification of Subracks...............................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Components of the Subrack............................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Fan Box...........................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).........................................................................................5-4
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).........................................................................................5-7
5.4 Slots in the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................5-9
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................5-10
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack........................................................................................................................5-11
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS....................................................................................................................5-12
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS.....................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS.....................................................................................................................5-15
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................5-16

6 Boards...........................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 DPUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board......................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board.........................................................................................6-8
6.2 DPUc Board....................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board.......................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board....................................................................................................................6-10
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board.......................................................................................6-11
6.3 DPUd Board..................................................................................................................................................6-11
6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board..............................................................................................................6-12
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board.....................................................................................................................6-12
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board....................................................................................................................6-13
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board.......................................................................................6-14
6.4 DPUf Board...................................................................................................................................................6-15
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board...............................................................................................................6-15
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board......................................................................................................................6-15
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board.....................................................................................................................6-16
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board.......................................................................................6-17
6.5 EIUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-18
6.5.1 Functions of the EIUa Board................................................................................................................6-18
viii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Contents

6.5.2 Panel of the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-18


6.5.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-19
6.5.4 Ports on the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-20
6.5.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board.........................................................................................................6-20
6.5.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board........................................................................................6-23
6.6 FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................................6-24
6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...............................................................................................................6-24
6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-24
6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board.....................................................................................................................6-25
6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-26
6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board........................................................................................6-27
6.7 FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................................6-27
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...............................................................................................................6-28
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-28
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board.....................................................................................................................6-29
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-30
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board........................................................................................6-30
6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board.......................................................................................................................................6-31
6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................6-32
6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-32
6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board........................................................................................................6-33
6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-34
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................6-35
6.9 GOUa Board..................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................6-36
6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-36
6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board...................................................................................................................6-37
6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-37
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board......................................................................................6-37
6.10 GOUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-39
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board............................................................................................................6-39
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-40
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.................................................................................................................6-41
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-42
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board....................................................................................6-42
6.11 MDMC Board.............................................................................................................................................6-44
6.11.1 Functions of the MDMC Board.........................................................................................................6-44
6.11.2 Panel of the MDMC Board................................................................................................................6-45
6.11.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board...............................................................................................................6-45
6.11.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board......................................................................................................6-46
6.12 OIUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-47
6.12.1 Functions of the OIUa Board.............................................................................................................6-47
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Contents

6.12.2 Panel of the OIUa Board....................................................................................................................6-47


6.12.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board...................................................................................................................6-48
6.12.4 Ports on the OIUa Board....................................................................................................................6-49
6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board......................................................................................6-49
6.13 OMUa/OMUb Board...................................................................................................................................6-51
6.13.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board...............................................................................................6-52
6.13.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board.....................................................................................................6-52
6.13.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board....................................................................................................6-54
6.13.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board.....................................................................................................6-55
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board.......................................................................6-55
6.14 PAMU Board...............................................................................................................................................6-56
6.14.1 Functions of the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................6-57
6.14.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.................................................................................................................6-57
6.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board................................................................................................................6-58
6.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................6-59
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board...................................................................................6-60
6.15 PEUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-60
6.15.1 Functions of the PEUa Board.............................................................................................................6-61
6.15.2 Panel of the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-61
6.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................6-62
6.15.4 Ports on the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-62
6.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................6-63
6.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.....................................................................................6-65
6.16 PFCU Board................................................................................................................................................6-66
6.16.1 Functions of the PFCU Board............................................................................................................6-66
6.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.........................................................................................................6-67
6.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-68
6.17 PFCB Board................................................................................................................................................6-69
6.17.1 Functions of the PFCB Board............................................................................................................6-69
6.17.2 Pins on the PFCB Board.....................................................................................................................6-69
6.17.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-71
6.18 POUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-71
6.18.1 Functions of the POUc Board............................................................................................................6-72
6.18.2 Panel of the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-72
6.18.3 LEDs on the POUc Board..................................................................................................................6-73
6.18.4 Ports on the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-74
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board.....................................................................................6-74
6.19 SCUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-76
6.19.1 Functions of the SCUa Board.............................................................................................................6-77
6.19.2 Panel of the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-77
6.19.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board..................................................................................................................6-78
6.19.4 Ports on the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-79
x

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Contents

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board.....................................................................................6-80


6.20 TNUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-80
6.20.1 Functions of the TNUa Board............................................................................................................6-81
6.20.2 Panel of the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-81
6.20.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board..................................................................................................................6-82
6.20.4 Ports on the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-83
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board.....................................................................................6-83
6.21 XPUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-84
6.21.1 Functions of the XPUa Board............................................................................................................6-84
6.21.2 Panel of the XPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-85
6.21.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board..................................................................................................................6-86
6.21.4 Ports on the XPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-87
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board.....................................................................................6-87
6.22 XPUb Board................................................................................................................................................6-88
6.22.1 Functions of the XPUb Board............................................................................................................6-89
6.22.2 Panel of the XPUb Board...................................................................................................................6-89
6.22.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board..................................................................................................................6-90
6.22.4 Ports on the XPUb Board...................................................................................................................6-91
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board.....................................................................................6-91
6.23 WOPB Board...............................................................................................................................................6-92
6.23.1 Functions of the WOPB Board...........................................................................................................6-92

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Power Cables...................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 PGND Cables..................................................................................................................................................7-6
7.3 Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................................7-8
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.....................................................................................................................................7-9
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.........................................................................................................7-11
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable.........................................................................................................................7-15
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable...............................................................................................7-17
7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable..........................................................................................................................................7-20
7.9 BITS Clock Cable.........................................................................................................................................7-22
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable................................................................................................................................7-24
7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-26
7.12 Straight-Through Cable...............................................................................................................................7-26
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................7-29
7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-30
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box..........................................................................7-31
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable.................................................................................................................7-33
7.17 OMU serial port cable.................................................................................................................................7-34
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable...........................................................................................................7-35

8 LEDs on the Boards....................................................................................................................8-1


8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board...............................................................................................................................8-3
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Contents

8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board...............................................................................................................................8-3


8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board...............................................................................................................................8-4
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board................................................................................................................................8-4
8.5 LEDs on the EIUa Board................................................................................................................................8-5
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board................................................................................................................................8-6
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board................................................................................................................................8-6
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................................8-7
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................................8-8
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board............................................................................................................................8-8
8.11 LEDs on the MDMC Board..........................................................................................................................8-9
8.12 LEDs on the OIUa Board............................................................................................................................8-10
8.13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board.............................................................................................................8-10
8.14 LEDs on the PAMU Board.........................................................................................................................8-11
8.15 LEDs on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................8-12
8.16 LEDs on the POUc Board...........................................................................................................................8-12
8.17 LEDs on the SCUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-13
8.18 LEDs on the TNUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-14
8.19 LEDs on the XPUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-15
8.20 LEDs on the XPUb Board...........................................................................................................................8-15

9 DIP Switches on Components.................................................................................................9-1


9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.............................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board....................................................................................................................9-3
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board...................................................................................................................9-6
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................9-6
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................9-7
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board....................................................................................................................9-10
9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board................................................................................................................................9-12

xii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Figures

Figures
Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure...............................................................................................................2-1
Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet...........................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR............................................3-5
Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)....................................................................3-7
Figure 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-6 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with the high-power power
distribution box) .................................................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T).......3-16
Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP
CC3310)..............................................................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs .........3-20
Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T).................................3-24
Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (Configured with C5210 or HP CC3310)...................3-25
Figure 3-13 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs................................3-31
Figure 3-14 Connections of signal cables for the TCR......................................................................................3-34
Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box.......................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)..............................................4-5
Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR..................................................4-7
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box...........................................................................4-8
Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box..........................................................................4-10
Figure 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/
EPR/TCR.............................................................................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM)
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack..........................................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough..............................................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-10 Cabling frame.................................................................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-11 KVM...............................................................................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM.................................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM..................................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-14 LAN switch.....................................................................................................................................4-17
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch.......................................................................................................4-17


Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch........................................................................................................4-18
Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)...................................................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).....................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM................................................................................................................4-21
Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).............................................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...............................................................................4-23
Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)................................................................................ 4-24
Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310).....................................................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)........................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).........................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack.....................................................................................4-29
Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack......................................................................................4-29
Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board).......................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board).......................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode...............................................5-12
Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode..............................................5-13
Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode............................................................5-13
Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode................................................5-14
Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode............................................. 5-14
Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode...........................................................5-15
Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)..........................................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)..........................................................................................................5-16
Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board....................................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board..................................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board...................................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-5 Panel of the EIUa board....................................................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-6 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-7 Panel of the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-25
Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-29
Figure 6-9 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board...................................................................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-10 Panel of the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-36
Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-41
Figure 6-12 Panel of the MDMC board............................................................................................................. 6-45
Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the MDMC board....................................................................................................6-46
Figure 6-14 Panel of the OIUa board.................................................................................................................6-48
Figure 6-15 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.................................................................................................. 6-53
Figure 6-16 Panel of the PAMU board.............................................................................................................. 6-58
xiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..............................................................................6-59


Figure 6-18 Panel of the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-61
Figure 6-19 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.............................................................................6-63
Figure 6-20 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-67
Figure 6-21 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-68
Figure 6-22 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-70
Figure 6-23 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-70
Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board................................................................................................................6-73
Figure 6-25 Panel of the SCUa board................................................................................................................6-78
Figure 6-26 Panel of the TNUa board................................................................................................................6-82
Figure 6-27 Panel of the XPUa board................................................................................................................6-86
Figure 6-28 Panel of the XPUb board................................................................................................................6-90
Figure 7-1 External power cable..........................................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks.......................................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack........................................................................7-5
Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable.............................................................................................................7-6
Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack....................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables............................................................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable...........................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable........................................................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable..............................................................................................7-12
Figure 7-10 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables ...............................................7-15
Figure 7-11 120-ohm twisted pair cable.............................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable...................................................................................7-17
Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables......................................7-20
Figure 7-14 Inter-TNUa cable............................................................................................................................7-21
Figure 7-15 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables..............................................................................7-22
Figure 7-16 75-ohm coaxial clock cable............................................................................................................7-23
Figure 7-17 120-ohm clock conversion cable....................................................................................................7-23
Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables....................................................................7-24
Figure 7-19 Y-shaped clock cable......................................................................................................................7-25
Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables........................................................................7-25
Figure 7-21 Line clock signal cable...................................................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-22 Shielded straight-through cable......................................................................................................7-27
Figure 7-23 Unshielded straight-through cable..................................................................................................7-27
Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the SCUa boards in different
subracks...............................................................................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-25 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................................7-29
Figure 7-26 Alarm box signal cable...................................................................................................................7-30
Figure 7-27 Connection of the alarm box signal cable.......................................................................................7-31
Figure 7-28 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................................7-32
Figure 7-29 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box......................7-33
Figure 7-30 GPS signal transmission cable........................................................................................................7-33
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 7-31 OMU serial port cable.................................................................................................................... 7-34


Figure 7-32 RS485 communication cable..........................................................................................................7-35
Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack...................................................................................9-2
Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board..................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board........................................................................................................9-6
Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................ 9-11
Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................ 9-11
Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-12
Figure 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-13

xvi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Tables

Tables
Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900...............................................................................................................2-2
Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations............................................................................3-5
Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations...............................................................................3-7
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).............................................................3-8
Table 3-4 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box)
.............................................................................................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.........................................3-15
Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T)........3-17
Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP
CC3310)..............................................................................................................................................................3-19
Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-21
Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the MPR.......................................................................................3-26
Table 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the EPR........................................................................................3-32
Table 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR........................................................................................3-35
Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box....................................................4-4
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)..........................4-5
Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR....................................................4-7
Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box........................................................4-9
Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box......................................................4-10
Table 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/
EPR/TCR.............................................................................................................................................................4-12
Table 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM)
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-13
Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch......................................................................................4-18
Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)...................................................4-20
Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)..................................................4-22
Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...........................................4-23
Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)............................................4-25
Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)...................................................4-26
Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).....................................................4-28
Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.................................................................4-30
Table 5-1 Components of the subrack..................................................................................................................5-4
Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)......................................................................5-5
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Tables

Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)........................................5-6
Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)......................................................................5-8
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)........................................5-9
Table 5-6 Description about the bits...................................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch...................................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack.............................................................................................5-16
Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards.................................................................................................6-1
Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board.....................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board........................................................................................6-8
Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board...................................................................................................................6-10
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board......................................................................................6-11
Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-13
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board......................................................................................6-14
Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board...................................................................................................................6-16
Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board......................................................................................6-17
Table 6-10 LEDs on the EIUa board..................................................................................................................6-19
Table 6-11 Ports on the EIUa board...................................................................................................................6-20
Table 6-12 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board........................................................................6-21
Table 6-13 Description of the different DIP switches........................................................................................6-22
Table 6-14 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board.....................................................................................6-23
Table 6-15 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-23
Table 6-16 LEDs on the FG2a board..................................................................................................................6-25
Table 6-17 Ports on the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-26
Table 6-18 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board.....................................................................................6-27
Table 6-19 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-27
Table 6-20 LEDs on the FG2c board..................................................................................................................6-29
Table 6-21 Ports on the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-30
Table 6-22 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board.....................................................................................6-31
Table 6-23 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-31
Table 6-24 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.....................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-25 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board......................................................................................................6-34
Table 6-26 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board........................................................................6-35
Table 6-27 LEDs on the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-37
Table 6-28 Ports on the GOUa board.................................................................................................................6-37
Table 6-29 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board...................................................................................6-38
Table 6-30 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-38
Table 6-31 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board....................................................................6-38
Table 6-32 LEDs on the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-41
Table 6-33 Ports on the GOUc board.................................................................................................................6-42
Table 6-34 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board...................................................................................6-43
Table 6-35 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-43
Table 6-36 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board....................................................................6-43
xviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Tables

Table 6-37 LEDs on the MDMC board..............................................................................................................6-45


Table 6-38 DIP switch on the MDMC board.....................................................................................................6-46
Table 6-39 LEDs on the OIUa board..................................................................................................................6-48
Table 6-40 Ports on the OIUa board...................................................................................................................6-49
Table 6-41 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board.....................................................................................6-50
Table 6-42 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-50
Table 6-43 Specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board.....................................................................6-50
Table 6-44 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board...................................................................................................6-54
Table 6-45 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board....................................................................................................6-55
Table 6-46 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board......................................................... 6-55
Table 6-47 Performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board..........................................................................6-56
Table 6-48 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................6-58
Table 6-49 DIP switch on the PAMU board...................................................................................................... 6-59
Table 6-50 Technical specifications of the PAMU board..................................................................................6-60
Table 6-51 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-62
Table 6-52 Ports on the PEUa board..................................................................................................................6-62
Table 6-53 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board........................................................................6-64
Table 6-54 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board.................................................................................... 6-65
Table 6-55 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-66
Table 6-56 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)............................................. 6-67
Table 6-57 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)...................................................6-68
Table 6-58 Technical specifications of the PFCU board....................................................................................6-68
Table 6-59 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)........................................................ 6-70
Table 6-60 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack).............................................................. 6-70
Table 6-61 Technical specifications of the PFCB board....................................................................................6-71
Table 6-62 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................6-73
Table 6-63 Ports on the POUc board..................................................................................................................6-74
Table 6-64 Hardware specifications of the POUc board....................................................................................6-74
Table 6-65 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission mode..........6-75
Table 6-66 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission mode...............6-75
Table 6-67 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC transmission mode........6-76
Table 6-68 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board....................................................................6-76
Table 6-69 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................6-78
Table 6-70 Ports on the SCUa board..................................................................................................................6-79
Table 6-71 Technical specifications of the SCUa board....................................................................................6-80
Table 6-72 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................ 6-82
Table 6-73 Ports on the TNUa board..................................................................................................................6-83
Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the TNUa board....................................................................................6-83
Table 6-75 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................6-86
Table 6-76 Ports on the XPUa board..................................................................................................................6-87
Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the XPUa board....................................................................................6-87
Table 6-78 LEDs on the XPUb board................................................................................................................ 6-90
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Tables

Table 6-79 Ports on the XPUb board..................................................................................................................6-91


Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the XPUb board....................................................................................6-91
Table 7-1 External power cables..........................................................................................................................7-3
Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)......................................................................................................................7-3
Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)......................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-4 External power cables..........................................................................................................................7-5
Table 7-5 Internal power cables...........................................................................................................................7-6
Table 7-6 PGND cables........................................................................................................................................7-7
Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables.......................................................................................................................7-9
Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables...............................................7-10
Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable...........................................................................7-11
Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-12
Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable.........................................................................7-13
Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-13
Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable....................................7-16
Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-17
Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-18
Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-19
Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-19
Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable....................................................................................................7-28
Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................7-29
Table 7-20 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-30
Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable....................................................................................................7-31
Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................7-32
Table 7-23 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-32
Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial port cable....................................................................................................7-34
Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable.........................................................................................7-35
Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board.....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board.....................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board....................................................................................................................8-4
Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board.....................................................................................................................8-4
Table 8-5 LEDs on the EIUa board......................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board......................................................................................................................8-6
Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board......................................................................................................................8-7
Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.........................................................................................................8-7
Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board....................................................................................................................8-8
Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board..................................................................................................................8-9
Table 8-11 LEDs on the MDMC board................................................................................................................8-9
Table 8-12 LEDs on the OIUa board..................................................................................................................8-10
Table 8-13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board...................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-14 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-15 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................8-12
xx

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Tables

Table 8-16 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................8-13


Table 8-17 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................8-13
Table 8-18 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................ 8-14
Table 8-19 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................8-15
Table 8-20 LEDs on the XPUb board................................................................................................................ 8-16
Table 9-1 Description about the bits.....................................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch.....................................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board............................................................................9-4
Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches............................................................................................9-5
Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board.........................................................................................................9-6
Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board..........................................................................................................9-7
Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board............................................................................9-9
Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)............................................... 9-11
Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack).....................................................9-12
Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)........................................................ 9-12
Table 9-11 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack).............................................................. 9-13

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxi

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware


Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.

03 (2010-09-20)
This is the third commercial release of V900R012C01.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content

Description

6.4.4 Technical Specifications


of the DPUf Board

The information about the processing capability of the


DPUf board is modified.

6.21.5 Technical Specifications


of the XPUa Board

The information about the processing capability of the


main control XPUa board and the non-main control XPUa
board is modified.

6.22.5 Technical Specifications


of the XPUb Board

The information about the processing capability of the


main control XPUb board and the non-main control
XPUb board is modified.

Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2010-06-21)
This is the second commercial release of V900R012C01.
Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue includes the following new topics:
l

7.17 OMU serial port cable

Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

01 (2010-04-10)
This is the first commercial release of V900R012C01.
Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new
topics:
l

4.2 Common Power Distribution Box

4.6 KVM

4.7 LAN Switch

4.8 GBAM

6.4 DPUf Board

6.11 MDMC Board

6.23 WOPB Board

Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following
changes:
Content

Description

3.5.3 Connections of Signal


Cables for the MPR

The description about the connections of signal cables for


the MPR (Configured with the GBAM) is added.

3.5.2 Connections of Power


Cables and PGND Cables in the
Cabinet

The description about the connections of power cables


and PGND cables in the MPR (Configured with the
GBAM) is added.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power


Outputs and Cabinet
Components

The description about the cabinet configured with


common power distribution box is added.

6.2 DPUc Board

The description about the slots for the DPUc board is


modified.

6.3 DPUd Board

The description about the slots for the DPUd board is


modified.

6.13 OMUa/OMUb Board

The description about the recommended slots for the


OMUa/OMUb board is modified.

6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board

The description about the GCGa board is added.

2 Physical Structure

Figure of the BSC6900 physical structure is modified.

Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

2 Physical Structure

Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.


Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.
Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

(1) GPS: Global Positioning System

(2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

2 Physical Structure

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900


Component

Description

Cabinet

For details, see 3 Cabinet.

Cables

For details, see 7 Cables.

GPS antenna system

The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,


and surge protector.
The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It
is optional.

LMT

The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal


that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal
software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The
LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.
For details, see the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Cabinet

About This Chapter


The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet.
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet
The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet.
3.2 Classification of Cabinets
Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended
processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).
3.3 Components of the Cabinet
When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from
those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of
the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet refer to cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC).
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet
This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows the single-door cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door cabinet.
Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet

3-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet

3.2 Classification of Cabinets


Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended
processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).

MPR
Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR
The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be
configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.

TCR
The number of TCRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume and the configuration modes
of subracks. Up to two TCRs can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to
configure a TCR.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

For details on the components of the MPR, the EPR, or the TCR, see 3.3 Components of the
Cabinet.

3.3 Components of the Cabinet


When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from
those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of
the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the OMU)/EPR/TCR


When the MPR cabinet is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are the
same as those of the EPR/TCR. The components are the power distribution box, subrack, air
defence subrack, independent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough. Figure 3-3
shows the components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.

3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

(1) Air inlet

(2) Independent fan subrack

(3) Subrack

(4) Air defence subrack

(5) Filler panel

(6) Power distribution box

(7) Cable rack

(8) Rear cable trough

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.
Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Component

Configuration

Power Distribution Box or


Power Distribution Box

One common power distribution box or one high-power


power distribution box is configured.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Component

Configuration

Subrack

l The MPR is configured with one main processing


subrack (MPS). In addition, depending on the traffic
volume, it is configured with zero to two extended
processing subracks (EPSs) or transcoder subracks
(TCSs).
l The EPR is configured with one to three EPSs,
depending on the traffic volume.
l The TCR is configured with one to three TCSs,
depending on the traffic volume.

Air Defence Subrack

Two air defence subracks are configured.

Independent Fan Subrack

Only one independent fan subrack is configured.

Rear Cable Trough

Three rear cable troughs are configured.

NOTE

The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)


When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, its components are the power distribution box,
subrack, air defence subrack, KVM, LAN switch, cabling frame, GBAM, and rear cable trough.
Figure 3-4 shows the components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM).

3-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)

(1) GBAM (2) Filler panel

(3) Cabling frame

(4) LAN switch (5) KVM

(6) Subrack (7) Air defence subrack (8) Power distribution box (9) Cable rack

(10) Rear cable trough

Table 3-2 lists the components of the MPR and describes their configurations.
Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Component

Configuration

Power Distribution Box

Only one common power distribution box


is configured.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Component

Configuration

Subrack

The MPR is configured with one MPS. In


addition, depending on the traffic volume,
it is configured with zero to two EPSs or
TCSs.

Air Defence Subrack

Two air defence subracks are configured.

KVM

The KVM is optional. The MPR can be


configured with one KVM.

LAN switch

One LAN switch is configured.

Cabling Frame

One cabling frame is configured.

GBAM

One GBAM is configured.

Rear Cable Trough

Three rear cable troughs are configured.

NOTE

The MPR can use the common power distribution box but not the high-power distribution box when it is
configured with the GBAM.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet


The technical specifications of the cabinet refer to cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC).
Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)
Item

Specification

Dimensions

2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

Height of the available space

46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight

l Empty cabinet 100 kg


l Cabinet in full configuration 320 kg

Rated input voltage

-48 V

Input voltage range

-40 V to -57 V

EMC

l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386


l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC

3-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet


This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components
This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power
distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components
in the cabinet.
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet
The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and independent
fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the
equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR
The signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS clock
cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR
The signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock
cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR
The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock
cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components


This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power
distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components
in the cabinet.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box


For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.
Figure 3-5 shows the relation between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is
configured with a high-power power distribution box. Table 3-4 describes the relation between
power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a high-power power
distribution box.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power
distribution box)

Table 3-4 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power
distribution box)
PDF Output

Input of Power
Distribution Box

Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box

Subrack Input

63 A -48 V DC
output 1

A1(-)

A7 NEG
(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on the


independent fan subrack

A8 NEG
(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

B7 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on the


independent fan subrack

B8 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2

A7 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 1 on the


independent fan subrack

63 A -48 V DC
output 2

63 A RTN power
output 1

3-10

B1(-)

A1(+)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

PDF Output

Input of Power
Distribution Box

63 A RTN power
output 2

100 A -48 V DC
output 1

B1(+)

A3(-)

100 A -48 V DC
output 2

B3(-)

100 A RTN power


output 1

A3(+)

100 A RTN power


output 2

B3(+)

Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box

Subrack Input

A8 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack


2

B7 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 2 on the


independent fan subrack

B8 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack


2

A9 NEG
(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1

A10 NEG
(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0

B9 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1

B10 NEG
(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0

A9 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack


1

A10 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack


0

B9 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack


1

B10 RTN
(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack


0

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box


Figure 3-6 shows the relation between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is
configured with a common power distribution box. Table 3-5 describes the relation between
power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a common power
distribution box.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-11

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-6 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power
distribution box)

Table 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power
distribution box)
PDF Output

Input of Power
Distribution Box

Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box

Subrack Input

100 A -48 V DC
output 1

-48V1

I -48V1

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

II -48V1

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1

III -48V1

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0

I -48V2

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2

II -48V2

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1

III -48V2

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0

RTN

RTN power input 1 on subrack


2

RTN

RTN power input 1 on subrack


1

100 A -48 V DC
output 2

100 A RTN power


output 1

3-12

-48V2

RTN

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

PDF Output

Input of Power
Distribution Box

100 A RTN power


output 2

RTN

Output
of Power
Distribut
ion Box

Subrack Input

RTN

RTN power input 1 on subrack


0

RTN

RTN power input 2 on subrack


2

RTN

RTN power input 2 on subrack


1

RTN

RTN power input 2 on subrack


0

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet


The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and independent
fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the
equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the
OMU Board)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the connections of power cables and PGND
cables in the MPR are the same as the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the
EPR/TCR. Figure 3-7 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR
(configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR that is configured with the high-power power
distribution box.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-13

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with the
high-power power distribution box)

Table 3-6 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.

3-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN

Description

5, 6, 11, 12

Power cables for the bottom subrack

3, 4, 9, 10

Power cables for the middle subrack

1, 2, 7, 8

Power cables for the top subrack

13

PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and


the mounting bar

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19

PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting


bar

24, 25, 26

Inter-cabinet PGND cables

27, 28, 29, 30

Power cables for the independent fan subrack

31

PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and


the mounting bar

50-57

PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the
GBAM)
Figure 3-8 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with GBAM IBM X3650T. Figure 3-9 shows the connections of power cables and
PGND cables in the MPR that is configured with GBAM HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-15

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM
X3650T)

Table 3-7 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with IBM X3650T.

3-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM
X3650T)

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

SN

Description

1-8

Power cables for subracks

9, 10

Power cables for the LAN switch

11

Power cable for the KVM

12

Monitoring signal cable for the power


distribution box

11.1.1, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.2.2

Power cables for the GBAM

13

PGND cable connecting the power


distribution box and the busbar

14, 15, 16, 17

PGND cables for subracks

18, 19

PGND cables connecting the busbars of


different cabinets

20

PGND cable for the KVM

21

PGND cable for the LAN switch

22, 23

PGND cables for the GBAM

24-31

PGND cables for cabinet doors and side


panels

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-17

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with
HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)

Table 3-8 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

3-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with
HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)
SN

Description

1-8

Power cables for subracks

11

Power cable for the KVM

12

Monitoring signal cable for the power


distribution box

11.1.1, 11.2.1

Power cables for the LAN switch

9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3,


11.2.3

Power cables for the GBAM

13

PGND cable connecting the power


distribution box and the busbar

14, 15, 16, 17

PGND cables for subracks

18, 19

PGND cables connecting the busbars of


different cabinets

20

PGND cable for the KVM

21

PGND cable for the LAN switch

22, 23

PGND cables for the GBAM

24-31

PGND cables for cabinet doors and side


panels

3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR


The signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS clock
cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-10 shows the connections of the signal cables
for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-19

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two
EPSs

NOTE

The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure
3-10 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-9 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

3-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR


SN

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Description

Connector Type
1/Connection
Position 1

Connector Type
2/Connection
Position 2

Remarks

1, 2, 3, 4 75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male
connector/CLKIN1
port on the GCUa
board in slot 13 of
the MPS

Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port

75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male
connector/CLKIN0
port on the GCUa
board in slot 13 of
the MPS

Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port

Figure 3-10
shows the
clock cables
connected to
the CLKIN1
and CLKIN0
ports. In
practice, only
one port is
used to
connect to the
BITS clock.

75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male
connector/CLKIN1
port on the GCUa
board in slot 12 of
the MPS

Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port

75-ohm coaxial
cable or 120-ohm
twisted pair cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male
connector/CLKIN0
port on the GCUa
board in slot 12 of
the MPS

Connector of the
BITS clock/BITS
clock port

Y-shaped clock
signal cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
SCUa board

RJ45/CLKOUT0
ports on the GCUa
boards in slots 12
and 13 of the MPS

RJ45/CLKIN port
on the SCUa board
in slot 7 of the EPS

Y-shaped clock
signal cable
connecting the
GCUa board to the
SCUa board

RJ45/CLKOUT0
ports on the GCUa
boards in slots 12
and 13 of the MPS

RJ45/CLKIN port
on the SCUa board
in slot 6 of the EPS

Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks

DB14/TDM port on
the TNUa board in
slot 4 or 5 of the
MPS

DB14/TDM port
on the TNUa board
in slot 4 or 5 of the
EPS

Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks

DB14/TDM port on
the TNUa board in
slot 4 or 5 of the
MPS

DB14/TDM port
on the TNUa board
in slot 4 or 5 of the
EPS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-21

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

3-22

SN

Description

Connector Type
1/Connection
Position 1

Connector Type
2/Connection
Position 2

Remarks

9, 10

E1/T1 cables for the


EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port
on the EIUa board
in slot 14 or 15 of
the MPS

DDF or other NEs

11

E1/T1 cable for the


EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port
on the EIUa board
in slot 14 or 15 of
the EPS

DDF or other NEs

12

Monitoring signal
cable for the power
distribution box

DB15/Port
connecting the
power distribution
box to the
independent fan
subrack

DB9/MONITOR 1
port on the
independent fan
subrack

13

Optical cable
between the MPS
and the TCS

LC optical port/Slot OIUa board in the


27 of the MPS
TCS, ODF, or other
NEs

14

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 7 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS

15

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 7 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS

16

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 6 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS

17

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 6 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS

18

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 7 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN

Description

Connector Type
1/Connection
Position 1

Connector Type
2/Connection
Position 2

Remarks

19

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 6 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
6 of the EPS

20

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 7 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS

21

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASET port on the SCUa
board in slot 6 of the
MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE
-T port on the
SCUa board in slot
7 of the EPS

22

Ethernet cable
between the OMUa
board and the
M2000/LAN

RJ45/Ethernet port
on the OMUa board

RJ45/Ethernet port
on the M2000 or of
the LAN

ETH0 or
ETH1 port on
the OMUa
board,
connecting to
the M2000 or
the LAN

23

Monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack

DB15/MONITOR
0 port on the
independent fan
subrack

DB9/Monitor port
on the rear of the
bottom subrack

The cable is
mandatory
and is
installed
before
delivery.
Only one
monitoring
signal cable
for the
independent
fan subrack is
configured.

Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)
Figure 3-11 shows the connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configured with GBAM
IBM X3650T. Figure 3-12 shows the connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configured
with GBAM C5210 or HP CC3310.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-23

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T)

3-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (Configured with C5210 or HP CC3310)

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-25

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet
NOTE

l Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 presents the connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configured
with only one MPS and one EPS. When more than one EPS is required, another cabinet is added. In
this case, the connections of signal cables for the EPS in the new cabinet are similar to the connections
of signal cables for the EPS in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12.
l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables for the MPS/EPS
in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site
planning.

Table 3-10 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.
Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the MPR
SN

Description

Connector Type 1/
Connection Position 1

Connecto
r Type 2/
Connectio
n Position
2

Remarks

1, 2, 3, 4

75-ohm coaxial cable or


120-ohm twisted pair
cable connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male connector/


CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board in slot 13 of
the MPS

Connector
of the BITS
clock/BITS
clock port

75-ohm coaxial cable or


120-ohm twisted pair
cable connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male connector/


CLKIN0 port on the
GCUa board in slot 13 of
the MPS

Connector
of the BITS
clock/BITS
clock port

75-ohm coaxial cable or


120-ohm twisted pair
cable connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male connector/


CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board in slot 12 of
the MPS

Connector
of the BITS
clock/BITS
clock port

Figure
3-11 shows
the clock
cables
connected
to the
CLKIN1
and
CLKIN0
ports. In
practice,
only one
port is used
to connect
to the BITS
clock.

75-ohm coaxial cable or


120-ohm twisted pair
cable connecting the
GCUa board to the
BITS clock

SMB male connector/


CLKIN0 port on the
GCUa board in slot 12 of
the MPS

Connector
of the BITS
clock/BITS
clock port

Y-shaped clock signal


cable connecting the
GCUa board to the
SCUa board

RJ45/CLKOUT ports on
the GCUa boards in slots
12 and 13 of the MPS

RJ45/
CLKIN
port on the
SCUa
board in
slot 6 of the
EPS

3-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

3 Cabinet

SN

Description

Connector Type 1/
Connection Position 1

Connecto
r Type 2/
Connectio
n Position
2

Y-shaped clock signal


cable connecting the
GCUa board to the
SCUa board

RJ45/CLKOUT ports on
the GCUa boards in slots
12 and 13 of the MPS

RJ45/
CLKIN
port on the
SCUa
board in
slot 7 of the
EPS

Cable connecting TNUa


boards of different
subracks

DB14/TDM ports on the


TNUa boards in slots 4
and 5 of the MPS

DB14/
TDM ports
on the
TNUa
boards in
slots 4 and
5 of the
EPS

Cable connecting TNUa


boards of different
subracks

DB14/TDM ports on the


TNUa boards in slots 4
and 5 of the MPS

DB14/
TDM ports
on the
TNUa
boards in
slots 4 and
5 of the
EPS

E1/T1 cable for the


EIUa or PEUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on the


EIUa or PEUa board in
slot 14 of the EPS

DDF or
other NEs

10

E1/T1 cable for the


EIUa or PEUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on the


EIUa or PEUa board in
slot 15 of the EPS

DDF or
other NEs

11

E1/T1 cable for the


EIUa or PEUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on the


EIUa or PEUa board in
slot 14 or 15 of the EPS

DDF or
other NEs

12

Monitoring signal cable


for the power
distribution box

DB15/Port connecting the


power distribution box to
a subrack

DB15/
MONITOR
port on the
rear of the
bottom
subrack

13

Optical cable

LC optical port/Slot 27 of
the EPS

OIUa board
in the TCS,
ODF, or
other NEs

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

3-27

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

3-28

SN

Description

Connector Type 1/
Connection Position 1

Connecto
r Type 2/
Connectio
n Position
2

Remarks

14

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot
7 of the MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/100
0BASE-T
port on the
SCUa
board in
slot 6 of the
EPS

15

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot
7 of the MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/100
0BASE-T
port on the
SCUa
board in
slot 7 of the
EPS

16

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot
6 of the MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/100
0BASE-T
port on the
SCUa
board in
slot 7 of the
EPS

17

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot
6 of the MPS

RJ45/The
10/100/100
0BASE-T
port on the
SCUa
board in
slot 6 of the
EPS

18

Ethernet cable between


SCUa board and GBAM

RJ45/GBAM

RJ45/The
10/100/100
0BASET10 port on
the SCUa
board in
slot 6 of the
MPS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

3 Cabinet

SN

Description

Connector Type 1/
Connection Position 1

Connecto
r Type 2/
Connectio
n Position
2

19

Ethernet cable between


SCUa board and GBAM

RJ45/GBAM

RJ45/The
10/100/100
0BASET10 port on
the SCUa
board in
slot 7 of the
EPS

20

Ethernet cable between


LAN switch and GBAM

RJ45/Ethernet port on the


GBAM

RJ45/
Ethernet
port on the
LAN
switch

Port 2 on
the LAN
switch is
connected
to the
GBAM.

21

Ethernet cable between


LAN switch and LMT
PC

RJ45/Ethernet port on the


LAN switch

RJ45/LMT
PC

Port 22 on
the LAN
switch is
connected
to the LMT
PC.

22

Ethernet cable between


LAN switch and
M2000/LAN

RJ45/Ethernet port on the


LAN switch

RJ45/
Ethernet
port on the
M2000 or
of the LAN

Port 24 on
the LAN
switch is
connected
to the
M2000 or
the LAN.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

3-29

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN

Description

Connector Type 1/
Connection Position 1

Connecto
r Type 2/
Connectio
n Position
2

Remarks

23

Cable between GBAM


and KVM

DB25 male connector/


Input port on the KVM

DB15 male
connector/
Port for the
video, PS2
male
connector/
Port used to
connect to
the Yshaped
cable for
mouse, PS2
male
connector/
Port used to
connect to
the Yshaped
cable for
keyboard

24

Ethernet cable between


LAN switch and CBC

RJ45/Ethernet port on the


LAN switch

RJ45/
Ethernet
port on the
M2000 or
of the LAN

Port 20 on
the LAN
switch is
connected
to the
CBC.

3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR


The signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock
cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-13 shows the connections of the signal cables
for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs.

3-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-13 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs

NOTE

The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure
3-13 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-31

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Table 3-11 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.
Table 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the EPR

3-32

SN

Description

Connector Type1/
Connection Position1

Connector Type2/
Connection Position2

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the MPS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the MPS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

SN

Description

Connector Type1/
Connection Position1

Connector Type2/
Connection Position2

10

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the MPS

11

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the MPS

12

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the EPS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the MPS

13, 14,
15

E1/T1 cable for the


EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on the


EIUa board in slot 14 or 15
of the EPS

DDF or other NEs

16, 17,
18

Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks

DB14/TDM ports on the


TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the EPS

DB14/TDM ports on the


TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the EPS

19

Monitoring signal
cable for the power
distribution box

DB15/Port connecting the


power distribution box to
the independent fan subrack

DB9/MONITOR 1 port on
the independent fan
subrack

20

Monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack

DB15/MONITOR 0 port on
the independent fan subrack

DB9/Monitor port on the


rear of the bottom subrack

3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR


The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock
cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-14 shows the connections of the signal cables
for the TCR.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-33

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

Figure 3-14 Connections of signal cables for the TCR

3-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet
NOTE

l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure
3-14 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l Among the multiple TCSs configured in the BSC6900 cabinet, one TCS is responsible for forwarding
the OM signals from other TCSs, and this TCS is referred to as the main TCS. In Figure 3-14, the
lowest TCS serves as the main subrack. In practice, any TCS can serve as the main subrack, and the
SCUa board in the main TCS is connected to the SCUa boards in other TCSs in star topology.

Table 3-12 describes the connections of signal cables for the TCR.
Table 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

SN

Description

Connector Type1/
Connection Position1

Connector Type2/
Connection Position2

Monitoring signal
cable for the power
distribution box

DB15/Port connecting the


power distribution box to
the independent fan subrack

DB9/MONITOR 1 port on
the independent fan
subrack

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the TCS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the TCS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the TCS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the TCS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the TCS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the TCS

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 6
of the TCS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-35

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

3 Cabinet

3-36

SN

Description

Connector Type1/
Connection Position1

Connector Type2/
Connection Position2

Ethernet cable
connecting SCUa
boards of different
subracks

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the main TCS

RJ45/The
10/100/1000BASE-T port
on the SCUa board in slot 7
of the TCS

10, 11,
12

Cable connecting
TNUa boards of
different subracks

DB14/TDM ports on the


TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the TCS

DB14/TDM ports on the


TNUa boards in slots 4 and
5 of the TCS

13, 14,
15

E1/T1 cable for the


EIUa board

DB44/E1/T1 port on the


EIUa board in slot 14 or 15
of the TCS

DDF or other NEs

16

Optical cable
between different
subracks

LC optical port/The RX/TX


port on the OIUa board in
slot 27 of the TCS

OIUa board of the MPS/


EPS or ODF

17

Monitoring signal
cable for the
independent fan
subrack

DB15/MONITOR 0 port on
the independent fan subrack

DB9/Monitor port on the


rear of the bottom subrack

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Components of the Cabinet

About This Chapter


Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box
or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,
independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cabling frame.
4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box
A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box
A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
4.3 Air Defence Subrack
The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
4.4 Rear Cable Trough
The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
4.5 Cabling Frame
The cabling frame provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
4.6 KVM
KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the
GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
4.7 LAN Switch
The LAN switch is configured in the MPR.
4.8 GBAM
The BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.
The GBAM is installed in the MPR.
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box


A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
The high-power power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection
for the four -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.
Each group has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The high-power power distribution
box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and
visual alarms when faults occur.
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel of
the Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to
a subrack, and a 2-hole grounding screw.
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
high-power power distribution box.
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box
The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a
fixed relation between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of
the cabinet.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel of
the Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.
Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box

(1) Panel of the PAMU board

(2) RUN LED

(3) ALM LED

(4) Mute switch

(5) Power switches

(6) Labels for power switches

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet


NOTE

For details about the PAMU board, see 6.14 PAMU Board.

When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the
RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the
power distribution box.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l

If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when
it is faulty.

If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible
alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the high-power power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The PAMU board is functional and


communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The PAMU board is not working or it


does not communicate with the SCUa
board properly.

OFF

There is no power supply to the PAMU


board or the power distribution box
does not work properly.

OFF

There is no alarm related to the power


distribution box.

ON

The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

ALM

Red

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to
a subrack, and a 2-hole grounding screw.
Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box.
4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block

(2) Power output terminal block

(3) Port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack

(4) 2-hole grounding screw

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
are labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3
(+) and 1(+) respectively.
l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power


Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)
Item

Sub-item

Specification

Input

Rated input voltage

-48 V DC or -60 V DC

Input voltage range

-40 V DC to -72 V DC

Input mode

Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A


consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group
B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each
group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
inputs.

Max. input current

The maximum rated input current of each route is


100 A.

Rated output voltage

-48 V DC or -60 V DC

Output
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Item

Sub-item

Specification

Output voltage
range

-40 V DC to -72 V DC

Output mode and


current

Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group


has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
outputs. The maximum rated output current of each
output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.
Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 and
B7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surge
protection function.

Output protection
specifications

The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need


to manually switch on the corresponding MCB
after the power surge protection.

Rated output power

9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.


Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)

NOTE
For group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 corresponds
to power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs
B1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power


Distribution Box
The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a
fixed relation between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of
the cabinet.
Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the eight power switches on the power distribution box
and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relation between the eight power
switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.

4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR

Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR
Component

Power Switch

Subrack 2

A8, B8

Subrack 1

A9, B9

Subrack 0

A10, B10

Independent fan subrack

A7, B7

4.2 Common Power Distribution Box


A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
The common power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection
for the two -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.
Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs. The common power distribution
box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and
visual alarms when faults occur.
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
The components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of the
Distribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, power
switches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

The components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distribution
box to a subrack.
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
common power distribution box.
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box
There is a fixed relation between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and the
components in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of the
Distribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, power
switches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).
Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the common power distribution box.
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Panel of the MDMC board

(2) RUN LED

(3) ALM LED

(5) Labels for power switches

(6) Power switches

(7) Panel of the WOPB board

(4) Mute switch

NOTE

For details about the MDMC and WOPB boards, see 6.11 MDMC Board and 6.23 WOPB Board.

CAUTION
l

Before operating a power switch, refer to the label for the power switch on the panel of the
common power distribution box.

Before removing a component from the cabinet, one must turn off the power switch that
controls power supply to the component and remove the power cable for the component.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l

4-8

If you set the mute switch to ON, the common power distribution box generates an audible
alarm when it is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

If you set the mute switch to OFF, the common power distribution box does not generate
an audible alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the common power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Table 4-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box.
Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The MDMC board is functional and


communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The MDMC is not working or it does not


communicate with the SCUa board
properly.

OFF

There is no power supply to the MDMC


board or the common power distribution
box does not work properly.

OFF

There is no alarm related to the common


power distribution box.

ON

The common power distribution box is


faulty. During the self-check of the
MDMC board, however, the ALM LED
is also on. This indicates that the ALM
LED is functional.

ALM

Red

NOTE

When the common power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the MDMC board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUN
and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the common power
distribution box.

4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distribution
box to a subrack.
Figure 4-5 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block (3) Port used to connect the power
distribution box to a subrack

NOTE

l Figure 4-5 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l The port on the power distribution box is connected to the bottom subrack through the monitoring
signal cable for the power distribution box.

On the power input terminal block and power output terminal block, the wiring terminals for
the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48 V and RTN, respectively.

4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution


Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
common power distribution box.
Table 4-5 describes the technical specifications of the common power distribution box.
Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box
Item

Sub-item

Specification

Input

Rated input voltage

-48 V DC

Input voltage range

-40 V DC to -57 V DC

Input mode

Two -48 V DC inputs

Max. input current

Two power inputs. The


maximum current of each
input is 100 A.

Rated output voltage

-48 V DC

Output
4-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Item

Sub-item

Specification

Output voltage range

-40 V DC to -57 V DC

Output mode and current

Six groups of independent


power outputs. Each group
has one -48 V DC power
output and one RTN power
output. Each output can be
switched on or off, and is
provided with the power
surge protection function.
When the total current of the
six outputs is smaller than
100 A, the maximum current
of each output is 70 A.

Output protection
specifications

The power surge protection


point is 87.5 A. You need to
manually switch on the
corresponding MCB after
the power surge protection.

Rated output power

Hot backup mode: 4,800 W

4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power


Distribution Box
There is a fixed relation between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and the
components in the cabinet.

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)/
EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on the
common power distribution box in the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switches
on the common power distribution box in the EPR/TCR. Figure 4-6 shows the relation between
the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in the cabinet.
Table 4-6 describes the relation between the six power switches on the common power
distribution box and the components in the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Table 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the OMU board)/EPR/TCR
Component

Power Switch

Subrack 2

SW1, SW4

Subrack 1

SW2, SW5

Subrack 0

SW3, SW6

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)


Figure 4-7 shows the relation between the six power switches on the common power distribution
box and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM. Table 4-7 describes
the relation between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the
components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

4-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the GBAM)

Table 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with
the GBAM)
Component

Power Switch

Subrack 1

SW1, SW4

Subrack 0

SW2, SW5

KVM

SW3

LAN switch

SW3

GBAM

SW3, SW6

4.3 Air Defence Subrack


The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

Physical appearance
Figure 4-8 shows the air defence subrack.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack

Dimensions
The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm
(depth).

4.4 Rear Cable Trough


The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
Figure 4-9 shows the rear cable trough.
Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough

4.5 Cabling Frame


The cabling frame provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
Figure 4-10 shows the cabling frame.

4-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-10 Cabling frame

4.6 KVM
KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the
GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

Appearance
Figure 4-11 shows the KVM.
Figure 4-11 KVM

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Front Panel
Figure 4-12 shows the front panel of the KVM.
Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM

(1) Handles

(2) Switch on the KVM

Back Panel
Figure 4-13 shows the back panel of the KVM.
Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM

(1) Grounding bolt

(2) DC input power socket

(3) Power switch

(4) Ports used to connect to the keyboard, video, and mouse

NOTE

To insert the KVM into the cabinet, press the white buttons on both sides of the KVM and slide the buttons
with index fingers, and at the same time insert the KVM into the cabinet. Then, release the buttons.

4.7 LAN Switch


The LAN switch is configured in the MPR.
The LAN switch has 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports. The LAN
switch connects the LMT PC to the BSC6900 and then connects the BSC6900 to the M2000.

Physical Appearance of the LAN Switch


The BSC6900 uses the Quidway S3026C LAN switches.
Figure 4-14 shows the LAN switch.
4-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-14 LAN switch

Front Panel of the LAN Switch


The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are mode switch button, configuration
port, LEDs, and Ethernet ports.
Figure 4-15 shows the front panel of the LAN switch.
Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch

(1) POWER LED

(2) Mode status LED (A/L LED)

(3) Mode status LED (D/S LED)

(4) Mode switch button (MODE button)

(5) 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports

(6) Configuration port (CONSOLE port)

NOTE

The CONSOLE port is used to configure the LAN switch to meet the requirements of the
BSC6900.

The MODE button is used to enable the LEDs for the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to display different
types of states.

LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch


There are three LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch: POWER LED, A/L LED, and D/S
LED.
Table 4-8 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch


LED

Color

POWER

Green

Yellow
(left)
A/L

Status

Description

ON

The LAN switch is powered on.

OFF

The LAN switch is powered off.

ON (blink)

The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is traffic over


the port.

OFF

ON
Green
(right)

The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is no traffic


over the port.
The port is in LINK OK mode (indicating correct
connection).

OFF

The port is in LINK FAULT mode (indicating no


connection) or in LINK ERROR mode (indicating
incorrect connection).

Yellow
(left)

ON

The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode.

OFF

The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode.

Green
(right)

ON

The rate of the Ethernet port is 100 Mbit/s.

OFF

The rate of the Ethernet port is 10 Mbit/s.

D/S

NOTE

Only ports 2, 4, 20, 22, 24 on the LAN switch are used.

Rear Panel of the LAN Switch


The components on the rear panel of the LAN switch are DC power socket and grounding post
for the PGND cable.
Figure 4-16 shows the rear panel of the LAN switch.
Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch

(1) DC power socket

(2) Grounding post for the PGND cable

4.8 GBAM
The BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.
The GBAM is installed in the MPR.
4-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

4.8.1 Functions of GBAM


The GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal
(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

4.8.1 Functions of GBAM


The GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal
(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The GBAM performs the following functions:
l

Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,


security management, and loading management functions for the system

Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa
board of the BSC6900

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-17 shows the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are LEDs, ports, switches, and
a CD-ROM drive.
Figure 4-18 shows the front panel of the GBAM server (IBM X3650T).

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Table 4-9 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

4-20

No.

Silkscreen Label

Description

None

CD-ROM drive

Power switch

Reset switch

CRT

The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm


indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it
indicates that a critical fault occurs in the system
and the system cannot work properly.

MJR

The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication.


When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a
major fault occurs in the system. Under this
circumstance, the system can still work properly;
however, the performance deteriorates
significantly.

MNR

The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm


indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it
indicates that a minor fault occurs in the system.
Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly.

PWR

The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm


indication. When this LED is on (yellow), it
indicates that the power supply for the system is
faulty.

Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

USB port

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No.

Silkscreen Label

Description

10

Hard disk 0 activity LED. When this LED is on


(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 0 can
be normally read or written. When this LED is on
(yellow), it indicates that hard disk 0 is faulty.

11

Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on


(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can
be normally read or written. When this LED is on
(yellow), it indicates that hard disk 1 is faulty.

12

ON

Main power LED

13

NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

14

System ID LED

15

ID switch, used to switch system IDs

16

None

NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the


system for fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are power port, grounding post,
and other ports.
Figure 4-19 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM

Table 4-10 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
No.

Silkscreen
Label

Description

Alarms

DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the


GBAM)

None

PCI card bracket (with no card inserted)

None

PCI card bracket (with a card inserted)

None

10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter

None

Power module

PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for the


mouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard.

Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

RJ45 NIC port 1

RJ45 NIC port 2

10

Port for the video

11

USB port 1

12

USB port 0

13

Server management port

14

Ultra320 SCSI port

15

Grounding post for the PGND cable

4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-20 shows the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

4-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Front Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (C5210) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CDROM drive.
Figure 4-21 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-11 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

No.

Silkscreen
Label

Description

None

CD-ROM drive

Power switch

Reset switch

CRT

The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a critical fault occurs in
the system and the system cannot work properly.

MJR

The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a major fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly; however, the performance deteriorates significantly.

MNR

The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a minor fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly.

PWR

The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that the power supply for the
system is faulty.

Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

USB port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No.

Silkscreen
Label

Description

10
11

Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it


indicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 2 is faulty.

12

Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it


indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 1 is faulty.

13

ON

Main power LED

14

NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

15

System ID LED

16

ID switch, used to switch system IDs

17

None

NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system for
fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) are power port, grounding
post, and other ports.
Figure 4-22 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-12 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

4-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
No.
1

Silkscreen
Label
1

Description
USB port 1

Port for the video

Ultra320 SCSI port

RJ45 NIC port 1

Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Yshaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to the
GBAM (C5210).

Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

None

USB port 2
10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
Grounding post for the PGND cable

10

None

DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48 V


power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN cable.)

11

Alarms

DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the


GBAM)

12

RJ45 NIC port 0

4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-23 shows the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310)

Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are LEDs, ports, switches, and
a CD-ROM drive.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-25

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-24 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-13 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
No.

Silkscreen
Label

Description

None

CD-ROM drive

Power switch

Reset switch

CRT

The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a critical fault occurs in the
system and the system cannot work properly.

MJR

The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a major fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly; however, the performance deteriorates significantly.

MNR

The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that a minor fault occurs in the
system. Under this circumstance, the system can still work
properly.

PWR

The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), it indicates that the power supply for the
system is faulty.

Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

USB port

10

4-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

No.

Silkscreen
Label

Description

11

Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it


indicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 2 is faulty.

12

Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it


indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or
written. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that hard
disk 1 is faulty.

13

ON

Main power LED

14

NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

15

System ID LED

16

ID switch, used to switch system IDs

17

None

NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system for
fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are power port, grounding post,
and other ports.
Figure 4-25 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-14 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-27

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
No.
1

Silkscreen Label
1

Description
USB port 1

Port for the video

Ultra320 SCSI port

RJ45 NIC port 1

Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a


Y-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to
the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

None

USB port 2
10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
Grounding post for the PGND cable

10

None

DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48


V power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN
cable.)

11

Alarms

DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the


GBAM)

12

RJ45 NIC port 0

4.9 Independent Fan Subrack


Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack
The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack
The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).

4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack


The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
The fan box can be configured with either the PFCU or the PFCB board, which does not affect
the appearance of the independent fan subrack.

4-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack


Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack

(1) PFCB or PFCU board

(2) Fans

(4) Screw

(5) LED on the fan box

(3) Handle of the independent fan subrack

NOTE

l The PFCU or the PFCB is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.16
PFCU Board. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.17 PFCB Board.
l When the PFCU board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the
fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For
details, see 5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).
l When the PFCB board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the
fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For
details, see 5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack


Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power (2) Power input port
distribution box

(3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)

(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack


The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-29

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-15 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.
Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack

4-30

Item

Specification

Dimensions

86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Weight

Empty subrack: 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: 6.9


kg

Power supply

-48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60


V DC.

Maximum power consumption

150 W

Fan speed

< 5.0 m/s

EMC

Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1


(2000-03).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Subracks

About This Chapter


This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.
5.1 Classification of Subracks
Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended
processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).
5.2 Components of the Subrack
The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
5.3 Fan Box
The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan
box.
5.4 Slots in the Subrack
The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane.
5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
5.6 Configuration of the Subrack
BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended
processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).

MPS
As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured
in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and
maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPS
As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the
basic services of the BSC6900.

TCS
As the transcoder subrack, the TCS is configured in the MPR, EPR, or TCR in BM/TC separated
configuration mode. It performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.

5.2 Components of the Subrack


The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the Subrack


In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in
height. Figure 5-1 shows the construction of the subrack with the front and rear views of the
component layouts of the subrack.

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack

(1) Fan box

(2) Mounting ear

(3) Guide rail

(4) Front cable trough

(5) Boards

(6) Grounding screw

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks
(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the
power distribution box

(9) Cover plate of the DIP switch

Components
Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.
Table 5-1 Components of the subrack
Component

Refer to...

Fan box

5.3 Fan Box

Slots in the subrack

5.4 Slots in the Subrack

Front cable trough

The front cable trough is used to lead the cables


from the front of the subrack to both sides of the
cabinet.

Backplane

The backplane is used to connect the boards in


the same subrack.

5.3 Fan Box


The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan
box.
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.

5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box

(2) Fans

(3) PFCU board

(4) LED on the fan box

(5) Screws

(6) Handles of the fan box

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and
keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operation of the fans.
l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.16 PFCU
Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.
Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Color

Status

Description

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The fan box works normally (the


fan box is registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s

The fan box works normally (the


fan box is not registered).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Color

Status

Description

Red

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The fan box is registered and has


one of the following problems:
l One-way power supply to
the subrack
l Communication failure
l Fans ceasing to run or
running at too low a speed
l Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s

The fan box is not registered and


has one of the following
problems:
l One-way power supply to
the subrack
l Fans ceasing to run or
running at a too low speed
l Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the same
subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the
SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,
detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.
Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

5-6

Item

Specification

Space height

1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range

-42 V DC to -60 V DC

Maximum power

150 W

Detectable temperature range

-5C to 55C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment

The speed of the fans can be adjusted from


55% to 100% of the full speed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks
NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)


This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box when
the fan box is configured with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications
of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)


The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-3 shows the fan box.
Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

(1) PFCB Board

(2) Fans

(4) Screw

(5) Handles of the fan box

(3) LED on the fan box

NOTE

l The PFCB board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.17 PFCB
Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)


The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-4 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Color

Status

Description

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The fan box is supplied with power in


two ways without any fault (and is
registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The fan box is supplied with power in


two ways without any fault (not
registered).

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The fan box is registered and has one of


the following problems:

Red

l One-way power supply to the


subrack
l Communication failure
l Fans ceasing to run or running at too
low a speed
l Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure
l Speed adjustment function failure
ON for 0.25s and OFF
for 0.25s

The fan box is not registered and has one


of the following problems:
l One-way power supply to the
subrack
l Fans ceasing to run or running at a
too low speed
l Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensor
failure
l Speed adjustment function failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the same
subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the
SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, input voltage range,
maximum power, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Item

Specification

Space height

1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range

-40 V DC to -57 V DC

Maximum power

150 W

Detectable temperature range

-5C to +55C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment

The speed of the fans can be adjusted from


55% to 100% of the full speed.

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.4 Slots in the Subrack


The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane.
Figure 5-4 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack

(1) Front slot

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

(2) Backplane

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

(3) Rear slot

5-9

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks
NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered
from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.
l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair
of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active and
standby slots.

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 5-5 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-6 describes the bits.
5-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Table 5-6 Description about the bits


Bit

Description

1-5

Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

Odd parity check bit

Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant


bit)

Reserved

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1.

Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2.

Set bit 7 to ON.

3.

Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8
remains unchanged.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 5-7
describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch
Sub
rack
No.

Bit
1

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Setting of the DIP


Switch

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack


BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typical
configurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS


The configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS
The configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS
In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS


The configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUa/OMUb board, SCUa board, GCUa
board, GCGa board, TNUa board, XPUa/XPUb board, DPUc board, DPUd board, DPUf board,
EIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, GOUa/GOUc board, POUc board, OIUa board, and PEUa board.
The following figures show the MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated, BM/TC
combined, and A over IP configuration modes.
Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode

5-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode

Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, POUc
board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in the
MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode).
For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and how to
maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS


The configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of the
BSC6900 subracks.
The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUa board, TNUa board, XPUa/XPUb
board, DPUc board, DPUd board, DPUf board, EIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, GOUa/GOUc
board, POUc board, OIUa board, and PEUa board.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

The following figures show the EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated, BM/TC
combined, and A over IP configuration modes.
Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode

Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode

5-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, POUc
board, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in the
MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode).
For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and how to
maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.6.3 Configuration of the TCS


In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.
By default, the TCS must be configured with the SCUa board and TNUa board. The DPUa/
DPUc/DPUf board and EIUa/OIUa board are optional boards.
Figure 5-12 shows the TCS in full configuration when E1/T1 transmission is used on the A
interface.
Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

5 Subracks

Figure 5-13 shows the TCS in full configuration when STM-1 transmission is used on the A
interface.
Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack


The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Table 5-8 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.
Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack
Item

Specification

Dimensions

530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Available space height

12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight

Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards:


57 kg

Power consumption in full


configuration

l MPS: 1,200 W
l EPS: 1,200 W
l TCS: 1,000 W

5-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Boards

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.
The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.
Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.
Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards
Board

Logical Function

Function
Description

Board Name

DPUc

GTC (GSM BSC TC)

GSM speech service


processing

Data Processing Unit


REV: c

DPUd

GPCU (GSM BSC PCU)

GSM packet service


processing

Data Processing Unit


REV:d

EIUa

Abis_TDM

Ater_TDM

32-port E1/T1 circuit


Interface Unit REV:a

Pb_TDM

A_TDM

GbIP (GSM BSC Gb IP


interface)

IP

FG2c

IP

12-port FE or 4-port
electronic GE interface
unit REV:c

GCUa

Clock

General Clock Unit


REV:a

FG2a

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-port FE or 2-port
electronic GE interface
unit REV:a

6-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Board

Logical Function

Function
Description

Board Name

GOUa

IP

2-port packet over GE


Optical interface Unit
REV:a

GOUc

IP

4-port packet over GE


Optical interface Unit
REV:c

OIUa

Abis_TDM

Ater_TDM

1-port channelized
Optical STM-1 Interface
Unit REV:a

Pb_TDM

A_TDM

OMUa

OAM (Operation,
Administration and
Maintenance)

OM management

Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:a

OMUb

OAM (Operation,
Administration and
Maintenance)

OM management

Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:b

PEUa

FR

HDLC

32-port Packet over E1/


T1/J1 interface Unit
REV:a

IP

TDM

IP

SCUa

MAC Switching

GE Switching network
and Control Unit REV:a

TNUa

TDM Switching

TDM switching Network


Unit REV:a

XPUa

GCP (GSM BSC Control


plane Process)

GSM BSC control


plane processing

eXtensible Processing
Unit REV:a

RGCP (Resource
Management and GSM
BSC Control plane Process)

Resource
management and
GSM BSC control
plane processing

MCP (Mathematics
Computing Process)

Mathematical
computing

GCP (GSM BSC Control


plane Process)

GSM BSC control


plane processing

POUc

XPUb

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-port IP over
channelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3 interface
Unit REV:c

eXtensible Processing
Unit REV:b

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Board

Logical Function

Function
Description

Board Name

RGCP (Resource
Management and GSM
BSC Control plane Process)

Resource
management and
GSM BSC control
plane processing

MCP (Mathematics
Computing Process)

Mathematical
computing

PAMU

Power Allocation
Monitoring Unit

PFCU

Fan Control Unit

PFCB

Fan Control Board

6.1 DPUa Board


DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the
TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed
in the TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.
6.2 DPUc Board
DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8
to 27.
6.3 DPUd Board
DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.4 DPUf Board
DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. The DPUf board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to twelve DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.5 EIUa Board
EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It can
be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on site
requirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS or
TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.6 FG2a Board
FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots
14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.7 FG2c Board
FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

depends on site requirements. The FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/
EPS.
6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board
GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.
6.9 GOUa Board
GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the
EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.10 GOUc Board
GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. The GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the
MPS/EPS.
6.11 MDMC Board
MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the
common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one
MDMC board.
6.12 OIUa Board
OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.13 OMUa/OMUb Board
OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb refers to Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:b. One or two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in the
BSC6900. The width of the OMUa/OMUb board is twice the width of other boards. Therefore,
one OMUa/OMUb board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20
to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
6.14 PAMU Board
PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.
6.15 PEUa Board
PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.16 PFCU Board
PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.17 PFCB Board
PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCB board.
6.18 POUc Board
6-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.19 SCUa Board
SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.20 TNUa Board
TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or two
TNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.21 XPUa Board
XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten
XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.22 XPUb Board
XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten
XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.23 WOPB Board
WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power
distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.1 DPUa Board


DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the
TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed
in the TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board
The DPUa board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board
The technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.

6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board


The DPUa board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
The DPUa board performs the following functions:
l

Encodes and decodes voice services

Provides data service rate adaptation

Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function


When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.

Provides the voice enhancement function

Detects voice faults automatically

6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.
Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the DPUa board.

6-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board

6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.
Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board in active mode.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board


The technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
Table 6-3 describes the technical specifications of the DPUa board.
Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

60 W

Weight

1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

6.2 DPUc Board


DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed in
6-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8
to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board


The DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board
There are only LEDs on the DPUc board.
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board
The technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board


The DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.
The DPUc board performs the following functions:
l

Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions


The DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding functions in any of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abis
over HDLC.

Encodes and decodes voice services


The DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding function in either of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The DPUc board
in the TCS performs the preceding function in BM/TC separated configuration mode.

Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function


When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.

Provides the voice enhancement function

Detects voice faults automatically

6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board


There are only LEDs on the DPUc board.
Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the DPUc board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board

6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.
Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board

6-10

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board


The technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-5 describes the technical specifications of the DPUc board.
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

49.40 W

Weight

1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Processing capability

Supporting 960 TCH/Fs; supporting 3,740 IWF


flow numbers

6.3 DPUd Board


DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board


The DPUd board processes GSM PS services.
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board
The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board


The DPUd board processes GSM PS services.
The DPUd board performs the following functions:
l

Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9

Processes packet links

Detects packet faults automatically

6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.
Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the DPUd board.

6-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board

6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.
Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF


for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and


OFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board


The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-7 describes the technical specifications of the DPUd board.
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board

6-14

Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption

49.40 W

Weight

1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Processing capability

Processing the PS services on up to 1,024


simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.4 DPUf Board


DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. The DPUf board is optional. For the MPS, two to
ten DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
two to twelve DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board


The DPUf board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board
There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board
The technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board


The DPUf board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
The DPUf board performs the following functions:
l

Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions


The DPUf board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding functions in any of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abis
over HDLC.

Encodes and decodes voice services


The DPUf board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding function in either of the following
configuration modes: BM/TC combined, or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The DPUf
board in the TCS performs the preceding function in BM/TC separated configuration mode.

Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function


When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.

Provides the voice enhancement function

Detects voice faults automatically

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.
Figure 6-4 shows the panel of the DPUf board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.
Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board

6-16

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board


The technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-9 describes the technical specifications of the DPUf board.
Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

80 W

Weight

1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Processing capability

l Supporting 1,920 TCHFs


l Supporting 7,680 IWF flow numbers in the
case of all-IP networking; Supporting 3,840
IWF flow numbers in the case of Abis over
TDM or Ater over TDM

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.5 EIUa Board


EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It can
be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on site
requirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS or
TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.5.1 Functions of the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.
6.5.2 Panel of the EIUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.
6.5.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.5.4 Ports on the EIUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT
port on the EIUa board.
6.5.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
6.5.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board
The technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

6.5.1 Functions of the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.
The EIUa board performs the following functions:
l

Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports for TDM transmission

Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048
Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s

Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol

Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol

Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby EIUa
boards

Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side

Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.5.2 Panel of the EIUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.
Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the EIUa board.
6-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-5 Panel of the EIUa board

6.5.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-10 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.
Table 6-10 LEDs on the EIUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-19

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status

Description

ALM

Red

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ACT

Green

6.5.4 Ports on the EIUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT
port on the EIUa board.
Table 6-11 describes the ports on the EIUa board.
Table 6-11 Ports on the EIUa board
Port

Function

Connector Type

E1/T1 (0-7)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 24-31

DB44

2M0 and 2M1

Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock


signal outputs, used to transmit
the clock signals obtained from
the line clock for system
reference

SMB male connector

TESTOUT

Port for clock signal outputs.


The clock signals are used for
testing.

SMB male connector

6.5.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 6-6 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
6-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-6 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this
case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.
In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to
and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 6-12 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.


Table 6-12 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

DIP Switch

Bit

Description

Setting for 75ohm Coaxial


Cable

Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable

S1

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 0-7

ON

OFF

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-21

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

DIP Switch

Bit

Description

Setting for 75ohm Coaxial


Cable

Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 8-15

ON

OFF

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
16-23

ON

OFF

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
24-31

ON

OFF

1-4

Reserved

S3

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 0-7

ON

OFF

S4

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 8-15

ON

OFF

S5

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 16-23

ON

OFF

S6

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 24-31

ON

OFF

Table 6-13 describes the different DIP switches.


Table 6-13 Description of the different DIP switches

6-22

DIP Switch

Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch

Used to select the logical transmission mode of the


board and to notify the software of the current
transmission mode

E1/T1 TX ground switch

Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end


of the E1/T1 signals

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards
NOTE

The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches
on the standby board.

The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

6.5.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board


The technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-14 describes the hardware specifications of the EIUa board.
Table 6-14 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption

28.60 W

Weight

1.16 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-15 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.


Table 6-15 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Specification

Abis

TRX

384

CIC(64K)

960

Ater

CIC(16K)

3,840

Pb

CIC(16K)

3,840

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-23

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.6 FG2a Board


FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is
optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots
14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board


As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board
There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board
The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board


As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
The FG2a board performs the following functions:
l

Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports

Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer

Supports the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces

6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
Figure 6-7 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

6-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-7 Panel of the FG2a board

6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-16 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 6-16 LEDs on the FG2a board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-25

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

ALM

Red

ACT

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board


There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-17 describes the ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-17 Ports on the FG2a board

6-26

Port

Function

Connector
Type

FE(1) to FE(3)

10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit


10/100M signals

RJ45

FE/GE(0)

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to


transmit 10/100/1000M signals

RJ45

2M0 and 2M1

Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs

SMB male
connector

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board


The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-18 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.
Table 6-18 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

38.48 W

Weight

1.36 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-19 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.


Table 6-19 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item

Specification

Abis

TRX

384

CIC(64K)

6,144

Gb

Maximum payload throughput


(physical layer)

128 Mbit/s

6.7 FG2c Board


FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. The FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/
EPS.
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-27

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.


6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board
There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board
The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board


As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The FG2c board performs the following functions:
l

Provides 12 channels over FE ports or four channels over GE ports

Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer

Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized
clock signals

Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces


NOTE

l The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The FG2c board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

6-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2c board

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-20 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.
Table 6-20 LEDs on the FG2c board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-29

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Orange

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board


There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-21 describes the ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-21 Ports on the FG2c board
Port

Function

Connector
Type

100BASE-T

100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M


signals

RJ45

100/1000BASE-T

100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to


transmit 100/1000M signals

RJ45

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board


The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
6-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-22 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.
Table 6-22 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption

85.4 W

Weight

1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-23 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.


Table 6-23 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item

Specification

Abis

TRX

2,048

CIC(64K)

23,040

Gb

Maximum payload throughput (physical


layer)

1,024 Mbit/s

6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board


GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.
The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12
and 13 in the MPS.
6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.
6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-31

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board
The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.
The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:
l

Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the
synchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signals
and the reference clock for the entire system

Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock

Generates RFN signals for the system

Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock
phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phase
in the case of active/standby switchover.

Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPS
card

6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

6-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-9 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board

6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-24 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-24 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-33

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-25 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-25 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board

6-34

Port

Function

Connector Type

ANT

Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGa


board is used to receive the timing signals and
positioning information from the GPS satellite. This
port is not used on the GCUa board.

SMA male
connector

CLKOUT0 to
CLKOUT9

Ports for providing synchronization clock signals.


The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signals
and 1PPS clock signals.

RJ45

COM0

Reserved

RJ45

COM1

Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals

RJ45

TESTOUT

Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are


used for testing.

SMB male
connector

TESTIN

Input port for testing external clock signals

SMB male
connector

CLKIN0 and
CLKIN1

Input port for BITS clock signals and line clock


signals

SMB male
connector

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.
Table 6-26 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-26 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W

Weight

GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0C-45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Clock accuracy grade

Grade three

6.9 GOUa Board


GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends
on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the
EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board
There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board
The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-35

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
The GOUa board performs the following functions:
l

Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission

Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

Supports the A and Abis interfaces

6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the GOUa board.
Figure 6-10 Panel of the GOUa board

6-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-27 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 6-27 LEDs on the GOUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-28 describes the ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-28 Ports on the GOUa board
Port

Function

Connector Type

RX

Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs

SMB male connector

TX
2M0 and
2M1

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board


The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-37

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-29 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.
Table 6-29 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane


of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption

37.30 W

Weight

1.20 kg

Operating temperature
(long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature
(short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (longterm)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity
(short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-30 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.


Table 6-30 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item

Specification

Abis

TRX

384

CIC(64K)

6,144

Table 6-31 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-31 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board
Item

6-38

Specification
Optical Module 1.25 G-850
nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-1310


nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Mode

Multi-mode

Single mode

Type

LC/PC

LC/PC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification
Optical Module 1.25 G-850
nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-1310


nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Maximum optical
transmission
distance

0.5 km

10 km

Maximum output
optical power

-2.5 dBm

-3.0 dBm

Minimum output
optical power

-9.5 dBm

-9.5 dBm

Minimum receiver
sensitivity

-17.0 dBm

-20.0 dBm

Overload receive
optical power

0.0 dBm

-3.0 dBm

Center wavelength

850 nm

1,310 nm

Transmission rate

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

6.10 GOUc Board


GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be
installed depends on site requirements. The GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the
MPS/EPS.
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board
As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board
There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board
The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-39

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

The GOUc board performs the following functions:


l

Provides four channels over GE ports

Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces


NOTE

l The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The GOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GOUc board.

6-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUc board

6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 6-32 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.
Table 6-32 LEDs on the GOUc board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-41

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

LINK (optical
port LED)

Green

ACT (optical
port LED)

Green

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board


There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-33 describes the ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-33 Ports on the GOUc board
Port

Function

Connector Type

RX

Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board


The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
6-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-34 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.


Table 6-34 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption

65.90 W

Weight

1.40 kg

Operating temperature
(long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature
(short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (longterm)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity
(short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-35 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.


Table 6-35 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item

Specification

Abis

TRX

2,048

CIC(64K)

23,040

Gb

Maximum payload throughput (physical


layer)

1,024 Mbit/s

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-36 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board
Item

Mode

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Specification
Optical Module 1.25
G-1310 nm-10 km-SMESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-850


nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Single mode

Multi-mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-43

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification
Optical Module 1.25
G-1310 nm-10 km-SMESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-850


nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Type

LC/PC

LC/PC

Center wavelength

1,310 nm

850 nm

Transmission rate

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

Transmission
distance

10 km

0.5 km

Maximum output
optical power

-3 dBm

-3 dBm

Minimum output
optical power

-9.5 dBm

-9 dBm

Minimum receiver
sensitivity

-23 dBm

-20 dBm

6.11 MDMC Board


MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the
common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one
MDMC board.
6.11.1 Functions of the MDMC Board
The MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.
6.11.2 Panel of the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.
6.11.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
6.11.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

6.11.1 Functions of the MDMC Board


The MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.
The MDMC board performs the following functions:

6-44

Detects the voltage of two -48 V power inputs

Detects one output of external temperature sensor

Detects one output of external humidity sensor

Detects two lightning protection circuits

Detects the status of the power switches for six power outputs
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Provides audible and visual alarms

Communicates with the SCUa board, so as to report the working status of the power
distribution box and exchange operation & maintenance (O&M) information

6.11.2 Panel of the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.
Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the MDMC board.
Figure 6-12 Panel of the MDMC board

(1) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.

6.11.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
Table 6-37 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Table 6-37 LEDs on the MDMC board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The MDMC board is functional and


communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-45

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

Color

Red

Status

Description

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The MDMC board is not working or it


does not communicate with the SCUa
board properly.

OFF

The power supply to the MDMC board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON

The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the MDMC
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

6.11.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board


The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
Figure 6-13 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.
Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.
To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 6-38.
Table 6-38 DIP switch on the MDMC board

6-46

Address

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Description

1 (the most significant


bit)

ON

ON

ON

4 (the least significant


bit)

ON

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards
NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 6-38.

6.12 OIUa Board


OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board is
optional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.12.1 Functions of the OIUa Board


The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.
6.12.2 Panel of the OIUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.
6.12.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.12.4 Ports on the OIUa Board
There are one optical port, two clock signal output ports, and one TESTOUT port on the OIUa
board.
6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board
The technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

6.12.1 Functions of the OIUa Board


The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.
The OIUa board performs the following functions:
l

Provides one STM-1 port for TDM transmission

Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby OIUa boards

Provides one channelized STM-1 with the transmission rate of 155.52 Mbit/s

Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol

Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol

Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side

Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.12.2 Panel of the OIUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.
Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the OIUa board.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-47

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-14 Panel of the OIUa board

6.12.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board


There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 6-39 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.
Table 6-39 LEDs on the OIUa board

6-48

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

Status

Description

ALM

Red

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF

The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

ACT

LOS

Green

Green

6.12.4 Ports on the OIUa Board


There are one optical port, two clock signal output ports, and one TESTOUT port on the OIUa
board.
Table 6-40 describes the ports on the OIUa board.
Table 6-40 Ports on the OIUa board
Port

Function

Connector
Type

RX

TX refers to the transmitting optical port, and RX refers to the


receiving optical port.

LC

2M0 and
2M1

Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signal outputs, used to transmit
the clock signals obtained from the line clock for system
reference

SMB male
connector

TESTO
UT

Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for
testing.

SMB male
connector

TX

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board


The technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-41 describes the hardware specifications of the OIUa board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-49

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-41 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board


Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane


of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption

20.80 W

Weight

0.94 kg

Operating temperature
(long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature
(short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (longterm)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity
(short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.


Table 6-42 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item

Specification

Abis

TRX

384

CIC(64K)

1,920

Ater

CIC(16K)

7,168

Pb

CIC(16K)

7,168

Table 6-43 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board.
Table 6-43 Specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board
Item

6-50

Specification
Optical Module 155
M-1310 nm-15 km-SMESFP

Optical Module 155 M-1310


nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Mode

Single mode

Multi-mode

Type

LC/PC

LC/PC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification
Optical Module 155
M-1310 nm-15 km-SMESFP

Optical Module 155 M-1310


nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Center wavelength

1,310 nm

1,310 nm

Transmission rate

155.52 Mbit/s

155.52 Mbit/s

Transmission
distance

15 km

2 km

Maximum output
optical power

-8 dBm

-14 dBm

Minimum output
optical power

-15 dBm

-19 dBm

Maximum receiver
sensitivity

-31 dBm

-30 dBm

6.13 OMUa/OMUb Board


OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb refers to Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:b. One or two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in the
BSC6900. The width of the OMUa/OMUb board is twice the width of other boards. Therefore,
one OMUa/OMUb board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20
to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
NOTE

This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUa/OMUb boards are installed
in slots 20 to 23.

6.13.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board


The OMUa/OMUb board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local
Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
6.13.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, there
are hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.
6.13.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
6.13.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board
This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa/OMUb board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk
capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-51

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.13.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board


The OMUa/OMUb board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local
Maintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The OMUa board performs the following functions:
l

Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,


security management, and loading management functions for the system

Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa
board of the BSC6900

6.13.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, there
are hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Figure 6-15 shows the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.

6-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-15 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever

(3) Self-locking latch

(4) RUN LED

(5) ALM LED

(6) ACT LED

(7) RESET Button

(8) SHUTDOWN Button

(9) USB port

(10) ETH0 Ethernet port

(11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port

(13) COM port

(14) VGA port

(15) HD LEDs

(17) Hard disks

(18) Screws for fixing the hard disk

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

(16) OFFLINE LED

6-53

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards
NOTE

l To power off the OMUa/OMUb board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector
levers away from the front panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off
the power switch.
l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.
l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.
l Powering off the board by pressing the SHUTDOWN button or resetting the system by pressing the
RESET button may scratch the surface of the hard disks of the OMUa board. Thus, avoid operating
the two buttons whenever possible.

6.13.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
Table 6-44 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-44 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

ON

The board can be removed.

OFF

The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being switched over to


the other working mode.

OFF

There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking

The hard disk is being read or


written.

ALM

ACT

OFFLINE

HD

6-54

Red

Green

Blue

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.13.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-45 describes the ports on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-45 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board
Port

Function

Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3

USB ports. These ports are used to


connect USB devices.

ETH0 to ETH2

GE ports

RJ45

COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC

Serial port. This port is used for


system commissioning or for
common serial port usage.

DB9

VGA

Port for the video

6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board


This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa/OMUb board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk
capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-46 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-46 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Index

Index of the OMUa Board

Index of the OMUb Board

Size

366.7 mm x 220 mm

366.7 mm x 220 mm

Power supply

Two routes of -48 V DC in


redundancy backup mode
(provided by the backplane
of the subrack)

Two routes of -48 V DC in


redundancy backup mode
(provided by the backplane
of the subrack)

Power consumption

120 W

90 W

Weight

4.0 kg

3.5 kg

Hard disk capacity

146 GB x 2 (RAID 1)

146 GB x 2 (RAID 1)

Memory capacity

2 GB

2 GB

Temperature required when


working for a long time

0C - +45C

0C - +45C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-55

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Index

Index of the OMUa Board

Index of the OMUb Board

Temperature required when


working for a short time

-5C - +55C

-5C - +55C

Relative humidity required


when working for a long time

5%-85%

5%-85%

Relative humidity required


when working for a short
time

5%-95%

5%-95%

Performance Counters
Table 6-47 describes the performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-47 Performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board
Counter

Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board

Number of recorded
alarms

The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.

Time when the standby


OMU data is
synchronized with the
active OMU data

The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU board every second.

Duration of the
synchronization between
the active OMU files and
standby OMU files

Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies


according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.

Duration of the
switchover between the
active and standby OMUs

Duration from when the request for OMU switchover is accepted


to when the switchover is finished. This duration lasts for two to
three minutes.

Duration of the OMU


restart

Duration of the OMU restart due to OMU fault. This duration


lasts for about three minutes.

6.14 PAMU Board


PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.
6.14.1 Functions of the PAMU Board
The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.
6.14.2 Panel of the PAMU Board
6-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
6.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
6.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board
The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.

6.14.1 Functions of the PAMU Board


The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.
The PAMU board performs the following functions:
l

Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms

Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms

Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and
communicates with the SCUa board

Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.14.2 Panel of the PAMU Board


On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-57

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-16 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED

(2) ALM LED

(3) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.

6.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 6-48 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 6-48 LEDs on the PAMU board

6-58

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The PAMU board is functional and


communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does not


communicate with the SCUa board
properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

Color

Red

Status

Description

OFF

The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON

The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

6.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 6-17 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
6-49.
Table 6-49 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Address

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Description

1 (the most significant


bit)

ON

ON

ON

4 (the least significant


bit)

ON

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-59

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards
NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-49.

6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board


The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.
Table 6-50 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.
Table 6-50 Technical specifications of the PAMU board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

340 mm 72 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode

Power consumption

15 W

Weight

0.2 kg

6.15 PEUa Board


PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.
It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed
depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.
For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.15.1 Functions of the PEUa Board


As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
6.15.2 Panel of the PEUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
6.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.15.4 Ports on the PEUa Board
There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
6.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
6.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board
The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
6-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.15.1 Functions of the PEUa Board


As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
The PEUa board performs the following functions:
l

Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1

Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP
links

Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa
boards

Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission


rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.

Supports the Abis and Gb interfaces

6.15.2 Panel of the PEUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
Figure 6-18 shows the panel of the PEUa board.
Figure 6-18 Panel of the PEUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-61

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-51 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.
Table 6-51 LEDs on the PEUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

6.15.4 Ports on the PEUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-52 describes the ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-52 Ports on the PEUa board

6-62

Port

Function

Connector
Type

E1/T1 (0-7)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1


signals on channels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1


signals on channels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1


signals on channels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31)

E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1


signals on channels 24-31

DB44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Port

Function

Connector
Type

2M0 and 2M1

Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs

SMB male
connector

6.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 6-19 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
Figure 6-19 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

(2) Bottom plate

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-63

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards
NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-19, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-19 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-53 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.
Table 6-53 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIP
Switc
h

Bit

Description

Setting of DIP
Switch

Meaning

S2

1-8

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

S4

S6

6-64

1-8

1-8

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

DIP
Switc
h

S8

Bit

1-8

S10

1-2

Description

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

DIP switch for setting the


working mode,
consisting of two bits

Setting of DIP
Switch

Meaning

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

(ON, ON)

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON)

Setting the
working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF)

Setting the
working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF)

Setting the
working mode to
J1 mode

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

6.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board


The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-54 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.
Table 6-54 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-65

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

27.53 W

Weight

1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-55 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.


Table 6-55 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item

Specification

Abis

TRX

384

Gb

Maximum payload
throughput (physical layer)

64 Mbit/s

6.16 PFCU Board


PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.16.1 Functions of the PFCU Board
The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
6.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.

6.16.1 Functions of the PFCU Board


The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
6-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

The PFCU board performs the following functions:


l

Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED

Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box

Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors

Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed

Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-20 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 6-20 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-56. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 6-56 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of DIP
Switch

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

OFF

ON

ON

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-67

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-21 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 6-21 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-57. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.
Table 6-57 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of DIP
Switch

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

ON

ON

OFF

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board


The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.
Table 6-58 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.
Table 6-58 Technical specifications of the PFCU board

6-68

Item

Specification

Dimensions

270 mm x 35 mm

Input voltage range

-40 V DC to -57 V DC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification

Frequency of PWM signals

1 kHz

Detectable temperature range

-5Cto +55C(basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment

The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%


to 100% of the full speed.

6.17 PFCB Board


PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCB board.
6.17.1 Functions of the PFCB Board
The PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.17.2 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
6.17.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board
The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and
requirement for fan speed adjustment.

6.17.1 Functions of the PFCB Board


The PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
The PFCB board performs the following functions:
l

Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED

Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box, and
responds to the fan speed adjustment command

Collects temperature information through temperature sensors and intelligently adjusts the
fan speed based on the temperature information

Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed

Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.17.2 Pins on the PFCB Board


The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-22 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-69

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-22 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 6-59.
Table 6-59 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
Pin
Numb
er

1-2

3-4

5-6

7-8

9-10

11-12

13-14

15-16

Connec
ted to
jumper

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)


Figure 6-23 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 6-23 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 6-60.
Table 6-60 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)

6-70

Pin
Numb
er

1-2

3-4

5-6

7-8

9-10

11-12

13-14

15-16

Connec
ted to
jumper

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards
NOTE

The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.17.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board


The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and
requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 6-61 describes the technical specifications of the PFCB board.
Table 6-61 Technical specifications of the PFCB board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

390 mm 50 mm

Input voltage range

-40 V DC to -57 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals

1 kHz

Detectable temperature range

-5Cto +55C(basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment

The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%


to 100% of the full speed.

6.18 POUc Board


POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The
POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc
boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.18.1 Functions of the POUc Board


As an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
6.18.2 Panel of the POUc Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
6.18.3 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.18.4 Ports on the POUc Board
There are four optical ports on the POUc board.
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board
The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-71

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.18.1 Functions of the POUc Board


As an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
The POUc board performs the following functions:
l

Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on TDM/IP
protocol

Supports the PPP function

Extracts line clock signals

Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUc boards

Supports the A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb interfaces


NOTE

The POUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. These two CPUs perform different functions when the
ports on the POUc board use different transmission modes.
l When the ports on the POUc board use IP transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance, and CPU1 mainly performs the control plane
functions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
l When the ports on the POUc board use TDM transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management
plane and control plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics
reporting, transmission port management and maintenance, as well as establishment and clearing of
channels for data flows, and CPU1 mainly processes the signaling according to the MTP2 and Ater SL
protocols.

6.18.2 Panel of the POUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
Figure 6-24 shows the panel of the POUc board.

6-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board

6.18.3 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 6-62 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.
Table 6-62 LEDs on the POUc board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading state.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-73

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

LOS

Color

Red

Green

Green

Status

Description

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF

The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.18.4 Ports on the POUc Board


There are four optical ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-63 describes the ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-63 Ports on the POUc board
Port

Function

Connector Type

RX

Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board


The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-64 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.
Table 6-64 Hardware specifications of the POUc board

6-74

Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

77.25 W

Weight

1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Table 6-65 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM
transmission mode.
Table 6-65 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission
mode
Item

Specification

Abis

TRX

512

CIC(64K)

3,906

Ater

CIC(16K)

7,168

Pb

CIC(16K)

7,168

Gb

Maximum payload throughput (physical


layer)

504 Mbit/s

Table 6-66 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP
transmission mode.
Table 6-66 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission
mode
Item

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Specification

Abis

TRX

2,048

CIC(64K)

23,040

Ater

CIC(16K)

23,040 (The TC subrack supports


only 13,000 CICs.)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-75

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Table 6-67 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC
transmission mode.
Table 6-67 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC transmission
mode
Item
Abis

Specification
TRX

2,048

Table 6-68 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-68 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board
Item

Specification
Optical Module 155
M-1310 nm-2 kmMM-SFP

Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-15 kmSM-ESFP

Optical Module 155


M-1310 nm-40 kmSM-ESFP

Mode

Multi-mode

Single mode

Single mode

Type

LC/PC

LC/PC

LC/PC

Maximum
optical
transmission
distance

2 km

15 km

40 km

Maximum
output optical
power

-14.0 dBm

-8.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

Minimum
output optical
power

-19.0 dBm

-15.0 dBm

-5.0 dBm

Minimum
receiver
sensitivity

-30.0 dBm

-31.0 dBm

-37.0 dBm

Center
wavelength

1,310 nm

1,310 nm

1,310 nm

Transmission
rate

155.52 Mbit/s

155.52 Mbit/s

155.52 Mbit/s

6.19 SCUa Board


SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.
Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.19.1 Functions of the SCUa Board


The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
6.19.2 Panel of the SCUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
6.19.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.19.4 Ports on the SCUa Board
There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and
one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board
The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

6.19.1 Functions of the SCUa Board


The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
The SCUa board performs the following functions:
l

Provides the maintenance management function

Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900

Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet

Supports the port trunking function

Supports the active/standby switchover

Enables inter-subrack connections

Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s

Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.19.2 Panel of the SCUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
Figure 6-25 shows the panel of the SCUa board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-77

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-25 Panel of the SCUa board

6.19.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-69 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.
Table 6-69 LEDs on the SCUa board

6-78

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.19.4 Ports on the SCUa Board


There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and
one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
Table 6-70 describes the ports on the SCUa board.
Table 6-70 Ports on the SCUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Port

Function

Connector
Type

10/100/100
0BASE-T0
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T9

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the intersubrack connection.

RJ45

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-79

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Port

Function

Connector
Type

10/100/100
0BASET10 to
10/100/100
0BASET11

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, the two ports are unused


in the BSC6900.

RJ45

COM

Serial port for commissioning.

RJ45

CLKIN

Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8


kHz clock signals from the GCUa board.

RJ45

TESTOUT

Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for
testing.

SMB male
connector

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board


The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
Table 6-71 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.
Table 6-71 Technical specifications of the SCUa board
Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

54.5 W

Weight

1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Switching capacity

60 Gbit/s

6.20 TNUa Board


TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or two
TNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6-80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

6.20.1 Functions of the TNUa Board


The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS
services of the entire system.
6.20.2 Panel of the TNUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.
6.20.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.20.4 Ports on the TNUa Board
There are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board
The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.

6.20.1 Functions of the TNUa Board


The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS
services of the entire system.
The TNUa board performs the following functions:
l

Provides 128K x 128K time slots TDM switching

Allocates the TDM network resources

6.20.2 Panel of the TNUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.
Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the TNUa board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-81

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-26 Panel of the TNUa board

6.20.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board


There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-72 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.
Table 6-72 LEDs on the TNUa board

6-82

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply,


but the board is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

Color

ALM

Red

ACT

Green

Status

Description

OFF

There is no power
supply, or the board is
faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

6.20.4 Ports on the TNUa Board


There are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.
Table 6-73 describes the ports on the TNUa board.
Table 6-73 Ports on the TNUa board
Port

Function

Connector Type

TDM0 to TDM5

TDM high-speed serial ports,


used to connect the TNUa
boards in different subracks

DB14

NOTE

The BSC6900 supports the inter-TNUa connections between the MPS and the EPS. It also supports the
inter-TNUa connections between the TCSs.

6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board


The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
Table 6-74 describes the technical specifications of the TNUa board.
Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the TNUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-83

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification

Power consumption

31.20 W

Weight

1.00 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

6.21 XPUa Board


XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten
XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.21.1 Functions of the XPUa Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa
board and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.
6.21.2 Panel of the XPUa Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.
6.21.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.21.4 Ports on the XPUa Board
There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board
The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

6.21.1 Functions of the XPUa Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa
board and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.
6-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Main Control XPUa Board


The main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l

Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks

Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks

Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSIRNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control XPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l

Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

Processing transport layer signaling

Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections

Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUa Board


The non-main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
The four subsystems of the non-main control XPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l

Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

Processing transport layer signaling

Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections

Processing RFN signaling

6.21.2 Panel of the XPUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.
Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the XPUa board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-85

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-27 Panel of the XPUa board

6.21.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-75 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.
Table 6-75 LEDs on the XPUa board

6-86

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

Status

Description

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data transmission over


the Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.21.4 Ports on the XPUa Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.
Table 6-76 describes the ports on the XPUa board.
Table 6-76 Ports on the XPUa board
Port

Function

Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to
10/100/1000BASE-T3

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet
ports

RJ45

6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board


The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-77 describes the technical specifications of the XPUa board.
Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the XPUa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-87

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification

Power consumption

75.40 W

Weight

1.60 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5C to +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control


XPUa board

Supporting 270 TRXs, 270 cells, 270 BTSs, and


492,000 Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCAs)

Processing capability of the non-main


control XPUa board

Supporting 360 TRXs, 360 cells, 360 BTSs, and


656,000 BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be
calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.22 XPUb Board


XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten
XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTE

If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in
slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.

6.22.1 Functions of the XPUb Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb
board and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.
6.22.2 Panel of the XPUb Board
There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.
6.22.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
6.22.4 Ports on the XPUb Board
There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board.
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board
6-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

6.22.1 Functions of the XPUb Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb
board and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.

Main Control XPUb Board


The main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l

Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks

Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks

Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSIRNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control XPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l

Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

Processing transport layer signaling

Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections

Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUb Board


The non-main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
The eight subsystems of the non-main control XPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l

Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces

Processing transport layer signaling

Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections

Processing RFN signaling

6.22.2 Panel of the XPUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-89

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Figure 6-28 shows the panel of the XPUb board.


Figure 6-28 Panel of the XPUb board

6.22.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-78 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.
Table 6-78 LEDs on the XPUb board

6-90

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Orange

Status

Description

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data transmission over


the Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.22.4 Ports on the XPUb Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board.
Table 6-79 describes the ports on the XPUb board.
Table 6-79 Ports on the XPUb board
Port

Function

Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to
10/100/1000BASE-T3

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet
ports

RJ45

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board


The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-80 describes the technical specifications of the XPUb board.
Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the XPUb board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Item

Specification

Dimensions

366.7 mm 220 mm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-91

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

6 Boards

Item

Specification

Power supply

Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption

52.3 W

Weight

1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term)

0Cto 45C

Operating temperature (short-term)

-5Cto +55C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term)

5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control


XPUb board

Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and


1,148,000 BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main


control XPUb board

Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and


1,312,000 BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be
calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.23 WOPB Board


WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power
distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.
6.23.1 Functions of the WOPB Board
The WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.

6.23.1 Functions of the WOPB Board


The WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.
The WOPB board performs the following functions:

6-92

Suppresses differential mode power surge

Suppresses common mode power surge

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Cables

About This Chapter


This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.
7.1 Power Cables
The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internal
power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
7.2 PGND Cables
The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
7.3 Optical Cable
The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.
7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable
The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are
located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.9 BITS Clock Cable
The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock
signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion
cables.
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable
The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.
7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable
The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa board.
7.12 Straight-Through Cable
The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straightthrough cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.
7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable
The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable
The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
7.17 OMU serial port cable
The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable
The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.

7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internal
power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distribution
box at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal
power cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal
power cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box


Table 7-1 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the highpower power distribution box. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the internal power cables when
the BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box.
Table 7-1 External power cables
Name

Color

CrossSectional
Area
mm2

Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1

Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2

Quantity

Externa
l -48 V
power
cable

Blue

25/35

2-hole JG
terminal/-48 V
DC input port on
the power
distribution box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the PDF

Four per cabinet

Externa
l RTN
power
cable

Black

25/35

2-hole JG
terminal/-48 V
DC input port on
the power
distribution box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the PDF

Four per cabinet

Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)


Name

Color

CrossSectional
Area
mm2

Internal
-48 V
DC
power
cable

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Blue

10

Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1

Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2

Quantity

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the subrack

Two per subrack

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Name

Color

CrossSectional
Area
mm2

Internal
RTN
power
cable

Black

10

Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1

Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2

Quantity

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the subrack

Two per subrack

Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1

Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2

Quantity

Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)


Name

Color

CrossSectional
Area
mm2

Internal
-48 V
DC
power
cable

Blue

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box

D-type
connector/
Power input
port on the
independent
fan subrack

Two per independent


fan subrack

Internal
RTN
power
cable

Black

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box

D-type
connector/
Power input
port on the
independent
fan subrack

Two per independent


fan subrack

Figure 7-1 shows the external power cable.


Figure 7-1 External power cable

(1) OT terminal

(2) 2-hole JG terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for subracks.

7-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks

Figure 7-3 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box


Table 7-4 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the
common power distribution box. Table 7-5 describes the internal power cables when the
BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box.
Table 7-4 External power cables
Name

Color

CrossSectional
Area
mm2

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1

Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2

Quantity

Externa
l -48 V
power
cable

Blue

25/35

Cord end
terminal/-48 V
DC input port on
the power
distribution box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the PDF

Four per cabinet

Externa
l RTN
power
cable

Black

25/35

Cord end
terminal/-48 V
DC input port on
the power
distribution box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the PDF

Four per cabinet

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-5 Internal power cables


Name

Color

CrossSectional
Area
mm2

Connector
Type 1/
Installation
Position 1

Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2

Quantity

Internal
-48 V
DC
power
cable

Blue

Cord end
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the subrack

Two per subrack

Internal
RTN
power
cable

Black

Cord end
terminal/-48 V
DC input port
on the power
distribution
box

OT
terminal/-48 V
DC output port
on the subrack

Two per subrack

The internal power cable and the external power cable have the same appearance when the
BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Figure 7-4 shows the external/
internal power cable.
Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable

X1: Cord end terminal

X2: OT terminal

7.2 PGND Cables


The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are
combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent
cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.
Table 7-6 describes the PGND cables.

7-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-6 PGND cables


Cable
Name

Color

CrossSectional
Area
mm2

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Connect
or Type
1/
Installati
on
Position
1

Connector
Type 2/
Installation
Position 2

Quantity

External
PGND
cable

Green and
yellow

25/35

OT
terminal/
Groundin
g bolt at
the top
rear of
each
cabinet

OT terminal/
PGND output
port on the PDF

One per
cabinet

Intercabinet
PGND
cable

Green and
yellow

OT
terminal/
PGND
busbar of
each
cabinet

OT terminal/
PGND busbar of
each cabinet

Three
between
every two
adjacent
cabinets

PGND
cable for
the power
distributio
n box

Green and
yellow

OT
terminal/
PGND
busbar of
each
cabinet

OT terminal/Port
for PGND cable
on the power
distribution box

One per
power
distribution
box

PGND
Green and
cable for
yellow
the subrack

OT
terminal/
PGND
busbar of
each
cabinet

OT terminal/Port
for the PGND
cable on the
subrack

Two per
subrack

PGND
cable for
the cabinet
door

Green and
yellow

OT
terminal/
Groundin
g bolt on
the base

OT terminal/
Grounding bolt
on the cabinet
door

Eight per
cabinet

PGND
cable for
the
independe
nt fan
subrack

Green and
yellow

OT
terminal/
PGND
busbar of
each
cabinet

OT terminal/
Grounding point
of the
independent fan
subrack

One per
independent
fan subrack

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for
the BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6
shows the other PGND cables.
Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables

7.3 Optical Cable


The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to
the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical Cable


According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be
classified into the following types:
l

LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable


NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical
interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site
requirements.
l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to the
ODF or other NEs or connects the optical interface boards.
l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with
temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected
to the RX port.

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical
signals cannot be received or transmitted.

BSC6900 Optical Cables


Table 7-7 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.
7-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables


Optical Cable Type

Appearance

LC/PC-LC/PC singlemode/multi-mode
LC/PC-FC/PC singlemode/multi-mode
LC/PC-SC/PC singlemode/multi-mode

Installation
The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board
in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC
connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of the
optical cable.
Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial
cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the
16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Appearance
Figure 7-8 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)

(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector
to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment
The outer shielding layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal
case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors
for the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables

7-10

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

W1
Signal

Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier

38

Ring

23

Tip

37

Ring

22

Tip

Remarks

R1

R2

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

W2
Signal

Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier

15

Ring

T1

30

Tip

14

Ring

T2

29

Tip

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

W1

Remarks

Signal

Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier

36

Ring

21

Tip

35

Ring

20

Tip

34

Ring

19

Tip

33

Ring

18

Tip

32

Ring

17

Tip

31

Ring

16

Tip

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

W2

Remarks

Signal

Micro
Coaxia
l Cable
Identif
ier

13

Ring

T3

28

Tip

12

Ring

T4

27

Tip

11

Ring

T5

26

Tip

10

Ring

T6

25

Tip

Ring

T7

24

Tip

Ring

T8

Tip

Table 7-9 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal

Bearer

Ring

Shielding layer of micro coaxial cables

Tip

Core of micro coaxial cables

Installation
One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUa
board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Appearance
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohm
coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All
of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Figure 7-9 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)
(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need
to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-10 and Table 7-12 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

7-12

X1

W3

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

Signal

Micro
Coaxial
Cable
Identifi
er

38

Ring

23

Tip

37

Ring

22

Tip

36

Ring

21

Tip

Remark
s

X1

W4

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

Signal

Micro
Coaxial
Cable
Identifi
er

R1

15

Ring

T1

30

Tip

14

Ring

T2

29

Tip

13

Ring

T3

28

Tip

R2

R3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remark
s

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

X1

W3

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

Signal

Micro
Coaxial
Cable
Identifi
er

35

Ring

20

Tip

34

Ring

19

Tip

33

Ring

18

Tip

32

Ring

17

Tip

31

Ring

16

Tip

Remark
s

X1

W4

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

Signal

Micro
Coaxial
Cable
Identifi
er

R4

12

Ring

T4

27

Tip

11

Ring

T5

26

Tip

10

Ring

T6

25

Tip

Ring

T7

24

Tip

Ring

T8

Tip

R5

R6

R7

R8

Remark
s

NOTE

In Table 7-10, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.
Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-11 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-10.
Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal

Bearer

Ring

Shielding layer of coaxial cables

Tip

Core of coaxial cables

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2


W2

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

W1

Pin of X1
Connector

Pin of X2
Connector

Remarks

Pin of X1
Connector

Pin of X2
Connector

Remarks

38

38

PAIR

15

15

PAIR

23

23

30

30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

W2

W1

Pin of X1
Connector

Pin of X2
Connector

Remarks

Pin of X1
Connector

Pin of X2
Connector

Remarks

37

37

PAIR

14

14

PAIR

22

22

29

29

36

36

13

13

21

21

28

28

35

35

12

12

20

20

27

27

34

34

11

11

19

19

26

26

33

33

10

10

18

18

25

25

32

32

17

17

24

24

31

31

16

16

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

NOTE

In Table 7-12, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer
of the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connected
to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial
cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through
transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be
connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-10 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.

7-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-10 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-11 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Figure 7-11 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of


the cable)

(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a
connector to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Pin Assignment
The outer shielding layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the
metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-13 describes the pin assignment of the DB44
connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable
Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

W1

Color

Signal

120Ohm
Twisted
Pair
Cable
Identifie
r

38

Ring/R-

R1

23

Tip/R+

37

Ring/R-

22

Tip/R+

36

Ring/R-

21

Tip/R+

35

Ring/R-

20

Tip/R+

34

Ring/R-

19

Tip/R+

33

Ring/R-

18

Tip/R+

32

Ring/R-

17

Tip/R+

31

Ring/R-

16

Tip/R+

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

W2

Color

Signal

120Ohm
Twisted
Pair
Cable
Identifie
r

Blue

15

Ring/T-

T1

White

30

Tip/T+

Orange

14

Ring/T-

White

29

Tip/T+

Green

13

Ring/T-

White

28

Tip/T+

Brown

12

Ring/T-

White

27

Tip/T+

Grey

11

Ring/T-

White

26

Tip/T+

Blue

10

Ring/T-

Red

25

Tip/T+

Orange

Ring/T-

Red

24

Tip/T+

Green

Ring/T-

Red

Tip/T+

Blue
White

T2

Orange
White

T3

Green
White

T4

Brown
White

T5

Grey
White

T6

Blue
Red

T7

Orange
Red

T8

Green
Red

Table 7-14 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-13.

7-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal

Bearer

Ring/R-

One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1


signals

Tip/R+

The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals

Ring/T-

One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1


signals

Tip/T+

The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/
T1 signals

Installation
One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/
PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-12 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector

(2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer
of the cable)
(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You
need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-15 and Table 7-17 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4
X1

W3

Color

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

Signal

Twiste
d Pair
Cable
Identifi
er

38

Ring/R-

R1

23

Tip/R+

37

Ring/R-

22

Tip/R+

36

Ring/R-

21

Tip/R+

35

Ring/R-

20

Tip/R+

34

Ring/T-

19

Tip/T+

33

Ring/T-

18

Tip/T+

32

Ring/T-

17

Tip/T+

31

Ring/T-

16

Tip/T+

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

X1

W4

Color

Pin of
DB44
Connec
tor

Signal

Twiste
d Pair
Cable
Identifi
er

Blue

15

Ring/R-

T1

White

30

Tip/R+

Orange

14

Ring/R-

White

29

Tip/R+

Green

13

Ring/R-

White

28

Tip/R+

Brown

12

Ring/R-

White

27

Tip/R+

Grey

11

Ring/T-

White

26

Tip/T+

Blue

10

Ring/T-

Red

25

Tip/T+

Orange

Ring/T-

Red

24

Tip/T+

Green

Ring/T-

Red

Tip/T+

Blue
White

T2

Orange
White

T3

Green
White

T4

Brown
White

T5

Grey
White

T6

Blue
Red

T7

Orange
Red

T8

Green
Red

NOTE

In Table 7-15, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-16 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-15.

7-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal

Bearer

Ring/R-

One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
to the BSC6900

Tip/R+

The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals to the BSC6900

Ring/T-

One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
from the BSC6900

Tip/T+

The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals from the BSC6900

Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2


Twisted Pair Cable W2

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Pin of X1
Connector

Pin of X2
Connector

38

38

23

23

37

37

22

22

36

36

21

21

35

35

20

20

34

34

19

19

33

33

18

18

32

32

17

17

31

31

16

16

Remarks

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

Twisted Pair Cable W1


Pin of X1
Connector

Pin of X2
Connector

15

15

30

30

14

14

29

29

13

13

28

28

12

12

27

27

11

11

26

26

10

10

25

25

24

24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

PAIR

7-19

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables
NOTE

In Table 7-17, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer
of the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are
connected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby
120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another
NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair
cable can also be connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-13 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

7.8 Inter-TNUa Cable


The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are
located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-14 shows the inter-TNUa cable.

7-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-14 Inter-TNUa cable

(1) DB14

(2) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)

(3) Main label (identifying the code, version, and


manufacturer of the cable)

Installation
The two DB14 connectors at one end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active and
standby TNUa boards in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the interTNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in another subrack.
Figure 7-15 shows the installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-21

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-15 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables

7.9 BITS Clock Cable


The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock
signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion
cables.

Appearance
Figure 7-16 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.
7-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-16 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector

(2) Label

Figure 7-17 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.


Figure 7-17 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector

2Label

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is
used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the
connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Installation
One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.
Figure 7-18 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-23

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable


The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.
NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

Appearance
Figure 7-19 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.

7-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-19 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)

(2) RJ45 connector

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa board in
the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the active and
standby GCUa boards in the MPS.
Figure 7-20 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.
Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-25

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable


The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa board.
NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent
to the GCUa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is not
required.

Appearance
Figure 7-21 shows the line clock signal cable.
Figure 7-21 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector

Installation
One end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface
board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board.

7.12 Straight-Through Cable


The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straightthrough cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-22 shows the shielded straight-through cable.

7-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-22 Shielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-23 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.


Figure 7-23 Unshielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin Assignment
Table 7-18 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straightthrough cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-27

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable


X1 End

Wire Color

X2 End

Wire Color

X1-1

White and orange

X2-1

White and orange

X1-2

Orange

X2-2

Orange

X1-3

White and green

X2-3

White and green

X1-4

Blue

X2-4

Blue

X1-5

White and blue

X2-5

White and blue

X1-6

Green

X2-6

Green

X1-7

White and brown

X2-7

White and brown

X1-8

Brown

X2-8

Brown

Installation
l

When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different
subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards
that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the
SCUa boards in different subracks

7-28

When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa board to other
devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1 on the
OMUa board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
Ethernet port on the other devices.

When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c board to other
devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

FG2a/FG2c board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
Ethernet port on the other devices.
l

When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the XPUa/XPUb board to the
CBC, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the
XPUa/XPUb board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to
an Ethernet port on the CBC.

7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan


Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-25 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-25 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one end
and a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-19 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Start

End

Description

Remarks

X1.1

X2.7

Tx+

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.6

Tx-

X1.3

X2.3

Rx+

X1.4

X2.2

Rx-

X1.5

X2.5

GND

X1.SHELL

X2.SHELL

X1.SHELL is
connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shielding layer.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Twisted pair

7-29

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Table 7-20 describes the signals listed in Table 7-19.


Table 7-20 Signals
Signal

Signal Description

Tx+

Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx-

Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+

Positive phase signal received

Rx-

Negative phase signal received

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at
the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.
NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to
top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the
bottom subrack in the cabinet.

7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable


The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type
must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal
cable with the DB9 connector as an example.
Figure 7-26 shows an alarm box signal cable.
Figure 7-26 Alarm box signal cable

7-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Pin Assignment
Table 7-21 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.
Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable
RJ45

DB9

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port
on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
serial port on the LMT.
Figure 7-27 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.
Figure 7-27 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution


Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance
Figure 7-28 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-31

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Figure 7-28 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and
a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-22 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
Start

End

Description

Remarks

X1.1

X2.3

Tx+

Twisted pair

X1.2

X2.2

Tx-

X1.3

X2.7

Rx+

X1.4

X2.6

Rx-

X1.5

X2.5

RTN

X1.SHELL

X2.SHELL

X1.SHELL is
connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shielding layer.

Twisted pair

Table 7-23 describes the signals listed in Table 7-22.


Table 7-23 Signals

7-32

Signal

Signal Description

Tx+

Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx-

Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+

Positive phase signal received

Rx-

Negative phase signal received

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is
connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the
other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-29 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.
Figure 7-29 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable


The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

Appearance
Figure 7-30 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.
Figure 7-30 GPS signal transmission cable

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-33

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables

X1: SMA male connector

X2: N-type female connector

X3: N-type male connector

Installation
Connect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector of
a 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmission
cable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected
to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end of
the cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.

7.17 OMU serial port cable


The OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

Appearance
Figure 7-31 shows the OMU serial port cable.
Figure 7-31 OMU serial port cable

Pin Assignment
Both ends of the OMU serial port cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-24 lists the
pins of the OMU serial port cable.
Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial port cable
DB9

DB9

Installation Position
One end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The
other end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance
terminal.
7-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

7 Cables
NOTE

The OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.

7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable


The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.

Appearance
Figure 7-32 shows the RS485 communication cable.
Figure 7-32 RS485 communication cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-25 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.
Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable
RJ45

DB9

Installation
The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9
female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end
of the cable is connected to J1 port on the power distribution box.
NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal
cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is
recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not
sufficient.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-35

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.5 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board
There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
8.11 LEDs on the MDMC Board
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
8.12 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
8.14 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
8.15 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.16 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.17 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.18 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.19 LEDs on the XPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.20 LEDs on the XPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

8-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.
Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board in active mode.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.
Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

Color

Status

Description

ALM

Red

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ACT

Green

8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.
Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF


for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and


OFF for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.
Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board

8-4

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

8.5 LEDs on the EIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.
Table 8-5 LEDs on the EIUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ALM

ACT

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Red

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

8-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board


LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Orange

8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

ALM

ACT

Color

Red

Green

Status

Description

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

8-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

LINK (optical
port LED)

Green

ACT (optical
port LED)

Green

8.11 LEDs on the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Table 8-11 LEDs on the MDMC board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The MDMC board is functional and


communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The MDMC board is not working or it


does not communicate with the SCUa
board properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

ALM

Color

Red

Status

Description

OFF

The power supply to the MDMC board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON

The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the MDMC
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

8.12 LEDs on the OIUa Board


There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.
Table 8-12 LEDs on the OIUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF

The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

ALM

ACT

LOS

Red

Green

Green

8.13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
8-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.


Table 8-13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

ON

The board can be removed.

OFF

The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is being switched over to


the other working mode.

OFF

There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking

The hard disk is being read or


written.

ALM

ACT

OFFLINE

HD

Red

Green

Blue

Green

8.14 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 8-14 LEDs on the PAMU board

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for


1s

The PAMU board is functional and


communicates with the SCUa board
properly.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

ALM

Color

Red

Status

Description

ON for 0.25s and OFF


for 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does not


communicate with the SCUa board
properly.

OFF

The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON

The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

8.15 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.
Table 8-15 LEDs on the PEUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

8.16 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.


Table 8-16 LEDs on the POUc board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF

The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

ALM

ACT

LOS

Red

Green

Green

8.17 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.
Table 8-17 LEDs on the SCUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for


0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ALM
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Red

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-13

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

LED

ACT

Color

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

Status

Description

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data
transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.18 LEDs on the TNUa Board


There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.
Table 8-18 LEDs on the TNUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading


state.

ON

There is power supply,


but the board is faulty.

OFF

There is no power
supply, or the board is
faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active


mode.

OFF

The board is in standby


mode.

ALM

ACT

8-14

Red

Green

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

8.19 LEDs on the XPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-19 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.
Table 8-19 LEDs on the XPUa board
LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data transmission over


the Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

8.20 LEDs on the XPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-20 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-15

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-20 LEDs on the XPUb board


LED

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF


for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON

There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF

There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

OFF

There is no alarm.

ON or blinking

There is a fault alarm.

ON

The board is in active mode.

OFF

The board is in standby mode.

ON

The link is well connected.

OFF

The link is disconnected.

OFF

There is no data transmission over


the Ethernet port.

Blinking

There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

ALM

ACT

8-16

Red

Green

LINK (at the


Ethernet port)

Green

ACT (at the


Ethernet port)

Orange

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board
The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

9-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-1 Description about the bits


Bit

Description

1-5

Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

Odd parity check bit

Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant


bit)

Reserved

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1.

Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2.

Set bit 7 to ON.

3.

Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8
remains unchanged.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 9-2
describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch
Sub
rack
No.

Bit
1

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Setting of the DIP


Switch

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board

(2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this
case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.
In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to
and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.


Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

9-4

DIP Switch

Bit

Description

Setting for 75ohm Coaxial


Cable

Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable

S1

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 0-7

ON

OFF

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switch

Bit

Description

Setting for 75ohm Coaxial


Cable

Setting for
120-ohm
Twisted Pair
Cable

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 8-15

ON

OFF

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
16-23

ON

OFF

Impedance
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
24-31

ON

OFF

1-4

Reserved

S3

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 0-7

ON

OFF

S4

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 8-15

ON

OFF

S5

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 16-23

ON

OFF

S6

1-8

TX ground
switch of E1s/
T1s 24-31

ON

OFF

Table 9-4 describes the different DIP switches.


Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

DIP Switch

Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch

Used to select the logical transmission mode of the


board and to notify the software of the current
transmission mode

E1/T1 TX ground switch

Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end


of the E1/T1 signals

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components


NOTE

The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches
on the standby board.

The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board


The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.
Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.
To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 9-5.
Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board
Address

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Description

1 (the most significant


bit)

ON

ON

ON

4 (the least significant


bit)

ON

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
9-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
9-6.
Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board
Address

Bit

Setting of DIP Bit

Description

1 (the most significant


bit)

ON

ON

ON

4 (the least significant


bit)

ON

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-6.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board

9-8

(2) Bottom plate

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components


NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the subboard, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-7 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.
Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIP
Switc
h

Bit

Description

Setting of DIP
Switch

Meaning

S2

1-8

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

S4

S6

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

1-8

1-8

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP
Switc
h

S8

Bit

1-8

S10

1-2

Description

TX ground switch of
E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

DIP switch for setting the


working mode,
consisting of two bits

Setting of DIP
Switch

Meaning

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

ON

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF

Setting the
working mode to
other modes

(ON, ON)

Setting the
working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON)

Setting the
working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF)

Setting the
working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF)

Setting the
working mode to
J1 mode

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are
set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

9-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of DIP
Switch

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

OFF

ON

ON

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-9. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch

Bit

Setting of DIP
Switch

Description

SW1

1 (the least significant


bit)

ON

ON

OFF

4 (the most significant


bit)

ON

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board


The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,
these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these
pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-8 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

9-12

Pin
Numb
er

1-2

3-4

5-6

7-8

9-10

11-12

13-14

15-16

Connec
ted to
jumper

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description

9 DIP Switches on Components

Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)


Figure 9-9 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as described
in Table 9-11.
Table 9-11 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)
Pin
Numb
er

1-2

3-4

5-6

7-8

9-10

11-12

13-14

15-16

Connec
ted to
jumper

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

NOTE

The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

Issue 03 (2010-09-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

You might also like